High Power Factor PWM Converter

High Power Factor PWM Converter
Instruction Manual
High Power Factor PWM Converter
with Power Regenerative Function (Stack Type)
RHC-D Series
RHC132S-4DE to RHC315S-4DE
RHC630B-4DE to RHC800B-4DE
• Read through this instruction manual to become familiar with the handling procedure of this product, and proceed to
installation, connection (wiring), operation, and maintenance inspection.
• Deliver this manual to the end user of this product. Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded.
• The product is subject to change without prior notice.
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
INR-SI47-1722c-E
Copyright © 2014Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission
from Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement.
Safety Precautions
Read the safety precautions thoroughly for safe use of
the product and become familiar with correct use before
handling the product.
Failure to heed the information, even though its symbol
, may cause serious results depending
is
on the situation. Since all WARNING and CAUTION
contain important factors, always observe their
precautions.
Safety precautions are classified into the following four
categories in this manual: WARNING, CAUTION and
NOTE.
The converter system is used to drive machinery in
various places, so it is impossible to anticipate all the
situations where troubles will be caused by potential
factors. Therefore, observe also the safety precautions
needed for inverters, motors, equipment, and the places
of use.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this
symbol may lead to dangerous conditions,
possibly resulting in death or serious bodily
injuries.
Remarks:
- Serious bodily injuries include loss of eyesight,
injury, burn (hot or cold), electric shock, fracture of a
bone, poisoning or the like. All of these cause
aftereffect and require hospitalization or attendance
at the hospital for a long term for cure.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this
symbol may lead to dangerous conditions,
possibly resulting in minor or light bodily
injuries and/or substantial property damage.
NOTE
- Minor and medium injuries indicate burns and
electric shock that does not require hospitalization or
long-term visiting care.
Offers important information for your understanding and handling of the product.
- Damage to the property means enlargement loss
concerning breakage of property and damage to the
equipment.
WARNING and CAUTION are given in Safety
Precautions and the section where injury or damage is
anticipated. NOTE is given only in the section that
requires additional information.
• Peripheral devices such as the filter stack, filtering resistors and reactors, and boosting reactors as well as the
heat sink become hot. NEVER touch these devices while the power is ON and immediately after the power is
turned OFF until they cool down.
Burns and injuries may result.
• Mount the front cover or the like without fail on the peripheral devices to keep them away from the reach of
people.
Electric shock or injury may result.
i
Application
• The PWM converter is intended for use in combination with a Fuji inverter that drives a three-phase induction
motor, and must not be used for any other purposes.
Fire could result.
• The PWM converter may not be used for a life-support system or other purposes directly related to the human
safety.
• Though the product is manufactured under strict quality control, install safety devices for applications where
serious accidents or property damages are foreseen in relation to the failure of it.
An accident could occur.
Installation
• Mount the converter on a base made of metal or other non-flammable material.
Otherwise, a fire could occur.
• Do not place flammable material nearby.
Doing so could cause fire.
• Install the converter in an inaccessible place, e.g., in a control panel.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.
• Do not support the converter by its front cover during transportation.
Doing so could cause a drop of the converter and injuries.
• Prevent lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, metallic chips, or other foreign materials from getting into the
converter or from accumulating on the heat sink.
Otherwise, a fire or an accident might result.
• Do not install or run a converter that is damaged or lacking parts.
Doing so could cause injuries.
• When changing the positions of the mounting bases, use the attached screws.
Otherwise, injuries could occur.
ii
Wiring
• When wiring the converter to the power source, insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) in the path of each pair
of power lines to the converter.
Otherwise, a fire could occur.
• Use the peripheral devices authorized by Fuji Electric for the converter.
Otherwise, a fire or bodily injuries could occur.
• Use wires in the specified size.
Otherwise, a fire could occur.
• Be sure to ground the converter's grounding terminals.
Otherwise, electric shock or fire could occur.
• Qualified electricians should carry out wiring.
Otherwise, an electric shock could occur.
• Ensure that the power is turned OFF (open circuit) before starting wiring.
Otherwise, an electric shock could occur.
• Be sure to complete installation of the converter before wiring.
Otherwise, an electric shock or injuries could occur.
• Never supply power to a converter whose parts are broken or coming off, or to a converter damaged in
transportation.
Doing so could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Never connect a DC reactor to the converter.
Doing so could cause a fire.
• Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the
voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected.
Otherwise, injuries could occur.
• Ensure that the polarity of the converter’s DC terminals (P(+) and N(-)) match that of the inverter’s ones.
Otherwise, an accident could occur.
• The converter, filter stack, inverter, motor and wiring generate electric noise. Be careful about malfunction of
the nearby sensors and devices. To prevent them from malfunctioning, implement noise control measures.
Otherwise, an accident could occur.
Operation
• Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON. Do not remove the cover when the converter
power is ON.
An electric shock could occur.
• Do not operate switches with wet hands.
Doing so could cause electric shock.
• Confirm that the Run signal is OFF before resetting an alarm. Resetting an alarm with the Run signal being ON
may cause a sudden motor start.
An accident could occur.
• Never touch the terminals when the power is supplied to the converter, filter stack or peripheral devices even if
the converter is stopped.
An electric shock could occur.
iii
• Do not touch the heat sink, filtering resistors, filtering reactors or boosting reactors because they become hot.
Burns may result.
Maintenance and inspection, and parts replacement
• Before proceeding to the maintenance/inspection, turn the power OFF, make sure that the charging lamp is
turned OFF. Further, make sure that the DC voltage across the terminals P(+) and N(-) and the terminal voltage
of the filtering capacitor is +25VDC or below.
Otherwise, an electric shock could occur.
• Maintenance, inspection, and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons.
• Take off the watch, rings and other metallic objects before starting work.
• Use insulated tools.
Otherwise, an electric shock or injuries could occur.
Disposal
• Treat the product as an industrial waste when disposing of it.
Otherwise, injuries could occur.
Others
• Never attempt to modify the product.
Doing so could cause an electric shock or injuries.
iv
Preface
Thank you for purchasing our PWM converter "RHC-D
series." This product is intended for use in combination
with a Fuji inverter (see the table below) as a
bidirectional device for converting AC current to DC
current and vice versa.
Read through this instruction manual to become
familiar with the handling procedure for correct use.
Improper handling might result in incorrect operation, a
short life, a failure of this product, or even substantial
property damage.
If there is anything that you do not understand about the
product or this instruction manual, contact the store you
purchased or your nearest Fuji sales representative.
This instruction manual does not contain the
information on how to handle inverters. For the
information, refer to the inverter instruction manual.
Even after reading this manual, read it again and again
whenever necessary. For this purpose, keep this manual
handy so that the user can refer to it any time.
List of applicable inverters
The table below lists the inverters that can be used in combination with this product.
The unit type and stack type of inverters can be used.
Inverter series
Capacity
Inverter type
Stack/unit type
VG series
All capacities
FRN………VG1S-4…
FRN………SVG1S-4… (*1)
FRN………BVG1S-4… (*1)
Unit type/stack type
MEGA series
All capacities
FRN………G1S-4… (*1)
Unit type
Ace series
All capacities
FRN………E2S-4… (*1)
Unit type
Eco series
All capacities
FRN………F1S-4… (*1)
Unit type
(*1) Contact Fuji Electric if using the combination.
Contents
1.
Outline ...................................................
1-1
2.
Before Use .............................................
2.1 Acceptance Inspection ..................
2.2 Appearance of the Product............
2.3 Handling the Product .....................
2.4 Transportation ...............................
2.5 Storage ..........................................
2-1
2-1
2-3
2-5
2-6
2-6
Installation and Connection ...................
3.1 Operating Environment .................
3.2 Installation and Layout ..................
3.3 Connection ....................................
3.3.1 General precautions
about connection ..........................
3.3.2 Terminal Function .........................
3.3.3 Terminal Layout Drawing ..............
3.3.4 Basic Connection Diagram ...........
3.3.5 Details of Connection ...................
3.3.6 Precautions for Installation ...........
3.3.7 Tightening torque and wire size for
devices applicable to the main circuit .....
3.3.8 Peripheral Devices .......................
3.3.9 Connecting Optional Devices .......
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-6
3-30
3-32
3-34
4.
Preparation for Operation ......................
4.1 Inspection and Preparation ...........
4.2 Driving Method ..............................
4.3 Test Run ........................................
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
5.
Operation Using the Keypad .................
5.1 Appearance ...................................
5.2 Operation and Display Screen ......
5.2.1 Screen Immediately After Auxiliary
Control Power Supply IsTurned On ........
5.2.2 Screen immediately after the main
circuit power supply is turned on ..
5.2.3 Switching LED monitor screens ...
5.2.4 Switching LCD screens ................
5.2.5 Configuring function code data.....
5.2.6 Checking function code settings ..
5.2.7 Monitoring the running status .......
5.2.8 Checking I/O signal states............
5.2.9 Displaying maintenance
information ..................................
5.2.10 Measuring load factor ...................
5.2.11 Displaying alarm information ........
5.2.12 Displaying alarm history and
cause ..........................................
5.2.13 Copying data ................................
5-1
5-1
5-2
3.
3-4
3-7
3-9
3-14
3-17
3-29
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-14
5-15
5-17
5-18
6.
Description of Function Codes ..............
6.1 Function Code Tables ....................
6.2 Details of Function Codes .............
6-1
6-1
6-2
7.
Troubleshooting ..................................... 7-1
7.1 List of Protective Functions ...........
7-1
7.2 Error Reset ....................................
7-3
7.3 Troubleshooting .............................
7-4
7.4 Converter Cannot Get Ready
to Run ............................................
7-13
8.
Maintenance and Inspection .................
8.1 Daily Inspection ..............................
8.2 Periodic Inspection .........................
8.3 Measurement of Electrical Quantity
in Main Circuit ...............................
8.4 Insulation Test ................................
8.5 Replacement Parts .........................
8.6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee
8-1
8-1
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-6
9.
Control Options......................................
9.1 Common Specifications .................
9.1.1 Option list......................................
9.1.2 Acceptance inspection .................
9.1.3 Installing a built-in option
(OPC-VG7) ...................................
9.2 T-Link Option .................................
9.2.1 Product Overview .........................
9.2.2 Model and specifications ..............
9.2.3 Specifications ...............................
9.2.4 External view ................................
9.2.5 Basic Connection Diagram ...........
9.2.6 Function codes .............................
9.2.7 Protective operation .....................
9.3 SX Bus Option ...............................
9.3.1 Product Overview .........................
9.3.2 Model and Specifications..............
9.3.3 Specifications ...............................
9.3.4 External View................................
9.3.5 Basic Connection Diagram ...........
9.3.6 Function Codes ............................
9.3.7 Protective Operation.....................
9.4 CC-Link Option ..............................
9.4.1 Product Overview .........................
9.4.2 Model and Specifications..............
9.4.3 Specifications ...............................
9.4.4 External View................................
9.4.5 Basic Connection Diagram ...........
9.4.6 Protective Operation.....................
9.5 DIO Option.....................................
9.5.1 Outline of Product.........................
9.5.2 Model and Specifications..............
9.5.3 Specifications ...............................
9.5.4 Dimensioned Drawing ..................
9.5.5 Basic Connection Diagram ...........
9.5.6 Function Codes ............................
9.5.7 Check Function ............................
9.6 AIO Option .....................................
9.6.1 Outline of Product.........................
9.6.2 Model and Specifications..............
9.6.3 Specifications ...............................
9.6.4 Dimensioned Drawing ..................
9.6.5 Basic Connection Diagram ...........
9.6.6 Function Codes ............................
9.6.7 Check Function ............................
9.7 SI Option........................................
9.7.1 Product Overview .........................
9.7.2 Model ............................................
9.7.3 Specifications ...............................
9.7.4 External drawings .........................
9.7.5 Connection ...................................
9.7.6 Basic connection diagram ............
9.7.7 Operation ......................................
9.7.8 Protection functions ......................
9.8 SIR Option .....................................
9.8.1 Product Overview .........................
9.8.2 Model ............................................
9.8.3 Specifications ...............................
9.8.4 External drawings .........................
9-1
9-1
9-1
9-1
9-2
9-10
9-10
9-11
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-15
9-15
9-16
9-16
9-17
9-17
9-19
9-20
9-22
9-23
9-24
9-24
9-25
9-25
9-27
9-28
9-29
9-31
9-31
9-32
9-32
9-33
9-35
9-36
9-36
9-37
9-37
9-38
9-38
9-39
9-40
9-41
9-41
9-42
9-42
9-42
9-43
9-44
9-45
9-49
9-50
9-52
9-54
9-54
9-54
9-55
9-56
10. Specifications.........................................
10.1 Standard Specifications .................
10.2 Common Specifications .................
10.3 External Dimensions .....................
10.4 Peripheral Devices ........................
10.5 Generating Loss ............................
10-1
10-1
10-2
10-4
10-8
10-11
11. Function Code Tables............................
11.1 Function Code Configuration .........
11.2 Function Code Tables ....................
11.3 List of Communication-dedicated
Function Codes ............................
11.4 Data Format List .............................
11-1
11-1
11-1
11-7
11-8
12. Conformity with Standards .................... 12-1
12.1 Compliance with European Standards 12-1
12.1.1 Compliance with EMC standards
12-1
12.1.2 Harmonic component regulation
in the EU ......................................
12-3
12.1.3 Compliance with the low voltage
directive in the EU ......................
12-4
12.2 Compliance with Functional
Safety Standard ............................
12-8
12.2.1 General ........................................
12-8
12.2.2 Notes ...........................................
12-9
12.2.3 Functional safety performance .... 12-10
12.2.4 Safe Torque Off (STO)................. 12-11
12.2.5 alarm............................................ 12-12
12.2.6 Prevention of restarting ............... 12-13
12.3 Compliance with UL Standards
and Canadian Standards ............... 12-14
Location of General Precaution and Warning Labels
PWM Converter (RHC-D Series)
v
Inside of the Products
PWM Converter (RHC-D Series)
If any of warning labels is torn, place an order for a new label with Fuji Electric and replace the torn label.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
Some drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of detail parts.
Restore the covers and shields in the original state before using the products.
vi
Substantial Increase of Braking
Performance
1 Outline
Outline of Product
The regenerative energy obtained in frequent
acceleration/deceleration operation or elevator returns
to the power supply side, promoting energy savings.
The high power factor PWM converter with power
regenerative function, the RHC-D series is used in
combination with a Fuji inverter to return the
regenerative energy generated on the load side to the
power source, improving the regenerating performance
and saving energy.
Since the waveform of the regenerative current is
sinusoidal wave, too, there is no need to be anxious
about trouble in the power supply system.
The converter shapes an input current waveform into a
sinusoidal waveform to enable driving at a power factor
of 1 so that it is possible to reduce the capacity of the
power supply equipment.
Continuous
regeneration
Short time rating
As well, the converter is useful for the replacement of
conventional applications using braking resistors, such
as cranes and vertical transfer machines and it is
compliant with the "Guideline for Suppressing
Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or
Special High Voltage" (conversion coefficient Ki = 0).
MD (CT) mode
LD (VT) mode
100%
100%
1 min. 150%
1 min. 110%
Variety of Assured Functions
• Monitors the source voltage, current, power, power
supply frequency and other trends.
• Provides three choices of languages (Japanese,
English and Chinese) to be displayed on the panel.
With simplified operation, it is possible to monitor the
input power supply, current, power, and load factor,
configure function codes, and check alarm history.
• Saves the converter load factor calculated,
cumulative run time, and data at the occurrence of
alarm into the memory.
Various communications options provided allow you to
monitor data from a remote site easily or to integrate
the converter in the customer's system without
difficulty.
• Issues overload and converter overheat early warning
signals before the converter stops due to an alarm.
The converter also applies to large capacity,
low-voltage inverters by controlling sharing of load to
the inverter uniformly with the parallel connection
option and input transformer.
• Shuts down the gate output at the time of a
momentary power failure and continues operation
immediately after the power is restored.
• Supports various communications protocols (Fuji
links such as T-Link and SX bus, and Open links
such as CC-Link and RS-485)
Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics
The PWM control regulates the power supply current
into a sinusoidal wave to contribute to substantial
reduction of harmonic currents.
Accordingly, the combination with an inverter can
handle the conversion coefficient Ki (specified in the
"Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers
Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage" issued
by the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry) as "0"
(that is, no generation of harmonics).
Possible to Reduce the Capacity of Power
Supply
By controlling the power factor, the converter supplies
the in-phase current relative to the power phase voltage,
enabling running at a power factor of 1. This makes it
possible to reduce the capacity of the power transformer
or the size of the devices to less than those of the
standard inverters.
1-1
2 Before Use
• Inadequate handling of the product during lifting or transportation will cause injuries or breakage of the
product. Trained personnel must handle the product, using suitable devices.
Injury may result.
2.1 Acceptance Inspection
Unpack the package and check if the converter unit, filter stack and peripheral devices are what you ordered and they
are free from damage. Also check that the models of the filter stack and peripheral devices match the converter type,
referring to Section 3.3.8 "Peripheral devices."
If you suspect the product is broken or not working properly or if you have any questions about your product, contact
your dealer or nearest Fuji sales representative and give him/her information about the following items.
-
Models of the converter, filter stack, and peripheral devices
Serial number (See below.)
Date of purchase
Inquiries (for example, point and extent of breakage, uncertainties, failure phenomena,
and other circumstances)
(1) PWM converter
Check that the converter is the type you ordered. You can check the type and specifications on the rating plate shown
in Figure 2.1-1. The keypad comes with the converter unit.
TYPE: Type of PWM converter
RHC 220 S – 4 D E
Shipping destination/Instruction manual language
J: Japan/Japanese, E: EU/English, C: China/Chinese
Series name
D series
Power supply voltage 4: 400V class
Stack type
S: Standard stack, B: Phase-specific stack
Standard applied inverter capacity 220: 220 kW
Product model
RHC
SOURCE:
OUTPUT:
WEIGHT:
SER. No.:
Power supply rating
Output rating
Mass
Product number
Manufacturing date
2 8 A 4 5 6 A 0 0 0 2 A A <2 3 2>
Production week
This indicates the week number that is numbered from 1st week of January.
The 1st week of January is indicated as '01'.
Production year: Last digit of year
Figure 2.1-1
Rating Plate
2-1
(2) Peripheral devices
When no filter stack is used, a boosting reactor, harmonics suppression filter (reactor, capacitor and resistor),
magnetic contactor, AC fuse, charging resistor and other accessories are separately required. Select those models
suitable for the PWM converter. For details, refer to Section 3.3.8 "Peripheral devices."
An AC fuse is separately required even when the filter stack is used.
Note: The peripheral devices do not come with the converter unit. Place a separate order for them.
a)
b)
c)
Boosting reactor
d)
Filtering resistor
e)
Magnetic contactor
f)
AC fuse
g)
Charging resistor
Filtering reactor
Filtering capacitor
Note: The shape of each peripheral device varies according to the capacity of the converter.
(3) Optional devices
The following items are options given in Section 3.3.9 "Connecting optional devices."
- Zero-phase reactor for reducing radio noise (ACL-††B)
- Power filter
The following items are options given in Chapter 10.
- Control options (OPC-VG7-TL, OPC-VG7-CCL, OPC-VG7-SX, OPC-VG7-SI, OPC-VG7-SIR, OPC-VG7-DIO,
and OPC-VG7-AIO)
2-2
2.2 Appearance of the Product
PWM converter
Hoist hole
(I26)
Hoist hole
(I26)
Handle
Cooling fans
P (+) bar
N (-) bar
Hoist hole
(I26)
Keypad
Main circuit
terminal
block
Main
nameplate
Handle
Hoist holes
(I26)
Casters
Front cover
Sub nameplate
Figure 2.2-1
Appearance of Converter (RHC132S to 200S-4DE (Rank 3))
Hoist hole
(I26)
Cooling fans
Hoist hole
(I26)
N (-) bar
P (+) bar
Handle
Main circuit
terminal
block
Keypad
Main
nameplate
Handle
Casters
Hoist holes
(I26)
Front cover
Figure 2.2-2
Sub nameplate
Appearance of Converter (RHC220S to 315S-4DE (Rank 4))
2-3
In the case of the phase-specific stack, a keypad is provided only on the S-PHASE stack.㻌
㻾㻙㻙㻼㻴㻭㻿㻱㻌㻌
㻿㻙㻙㻼㻴㻭㻿㻱㻌㻌
Hoist hole (I26)
㼀㻙㻙㻼㻴㻭㻿㻱㻌㻌
Hoist hole (I26)
Hoist hole (I26)
P (+) bar
N (-) bar
Keypad
Handle
Front cover
Handle
Main nameplate
Hoist hole (I26)
Cooling fans
Main circuit
terminal
block
Casters
Sub nameplat
Figure 2.2-3
Appearance of Converter (RHC630B to 800B-4DE (Rank 4))
2-4
2.3 Handling the Product
(1) Removing the front cover
Loosen the front cover mounting screws and remove the front cover.
When removing the front cover from the PWM converter, slide the blanking cover beneath the keypad down
beforehand as shown in the lower right figures.
In the case of the phase-specific stack, only the S-phase stack has a keypad.
Loosen the screws on the
blanking cover beneath the
keypad.
Front cover
Slide the blanking cover
down.
Figure 2.3-1
Removal of Front Cover
(2) Removing the keypad
Loosen the keypad mounting screws, insert your finger into the cutout provided in the front cover and remove the
keypad slowly. Rough handling may break the connectors.
Keypad mounting screws
Figure 2.3-2
Removal of Keypad
2-5
2.4 Transportation
2.5 Storage Environment
(1) Temporary storage
Store the product in an environment that satisfies the
requirements listed below.
Do not hold the covers or components during
transportation.
Table 2.5-1
The converter may fall or turn over, causing
injuries.
Storage Environment
Item
Ambient
temperature
Storage
temperature
When carrying the product, be sure to hold the handles
(provided on the front side) or the rear side of the unit.
Holding the covers or components may fall or turn over
the product. When carrying the product with casters, in
particular, take extra care for avoiding turnover.
Specification
-10 to + 40°C
-25 to + 70°C
(Note 1)
Relative
humidity
To use a hoist or crane for carrying the product, pass the
hook or rope through hoist holes.
Atmosphere
Rear of the unit
Places not subjected to
abrupt temperature changes
or condensation or freezing
5 to 95%
(Note 2)
The product must not be exposed to dust,
direct sunlight, corrosive or flammable gases,
oil mist, vapor, water drops or vibration. The
atmosphere must contain only a low level of
salt.
Note 1: Assuming comparatively short-time storage, e.g.,
during transportation or the like.
Note 2: Even if the humidity is within the specified
requirements, avoid such places where the product will be
subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause
condensation to form.
Precautions for temporary storage
1) Do not leave the product directly on the floor.
2) If the environment does not satisfy the specified
requirements listed above, wrap the product in an
airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage.
3) If the product is to be stored in a high-humidity
environment, put a drying agent (such as silica gel)
in the airtight package described in item 2).
Handle
(2) Long-term storage
The long-term storage method of the product varies
largely according to the environment of the storage site.
General storage methods are given below.
Handle
Carrying
direction
1) The storage site must satisfy the requirements
specified for temporary storage.
However, for storage exceeding three months, the
ambient temperature range should be within the
range from -10 to 30qC. This is to prevent
electrolytic capacitors in the product from
deterioration.
2) The package must be airtight to protect the product
from moisture. Add a drying agent in the package to
maintain the relative humidity inside the package
within 70%.
3) If the product has been installed to the equipment or
panel at construction sites where it may be subjected
to humidity, dust or dirt, then temporarily remove
the product and store it in a preferable environment.
4) If the product has not been powered on for a long
time, the property of the electrolytic capacitors may
deteriorate. Power the product on once a year.
Figure 2.4-1 Carrying
Direction and Location of Handles
2-6
3 Installation and Connection
3.1 Operating Environment
Install the converter in an environment shown in Table 3.1-1.
Table 3.1-1
Environmental Requirements
Item
Specifications
Site location
Indoors
Ambient temperature
-10 to +40°C
Relative humidity
5 to 95% (No condensation)
Atmosphere
The converter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive gases, flammable gases,
oil mist, vapor or water drops.
The atmosphere can contain a small amount of salt.
The converter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause
condensation to form.
Altitude
1000 m max.
(Refer to Table 3.1-2 for altitudes exceeding 1000 m.)
Vibration
2 to 9 Hz: 0.3 mm (Max. amplitude)
9 to 200 Hz: Less than 1 m/s2 (0.1 G)
Table 3.1-2
Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude
Altitude
Output current derating factor
1000 m or lower
1.00
1000 to 1500 m
0.97
1500 to 2000 m
0.95
2000 to 2500 m
0.91
2500 to 3000 m
0.88
3-1
3.2 Installation and Layout
4) Follow Fig. 3.2-2 about clearances of between stacks
of Phase-specific
• Prevent lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, metallic
chips, or other foreign materials from getting into
the converter and filter stack or from accumulating
on the heat sink.
Otherwise, a fire could occur.
• Do not install or run a damaged converter or filter
stack. There should be no parts missing.
Injury may result.
• Install the converter in a panel or at places where
people can not touch it easily.
Electric shock or injury may result.
5) The converter generates heat in running. When
mounting the converter in a control panel, therefore,
take extra care with ventilation inside the panel to
prevent the ambient temperature from exceeding the
specified limit. Do not install the converter in a small
airtight box with poor ventilation.
6) The generated heat is radiated upwards by fans inside
the converter and filter stack. Do not install the
converter or filter stack beneath devices sensitive to
heat.
1) Install the converter and filter stack vertically to a
robust structure with specified bolts so that the
"PWM CONVERTER" and "FILTER STACK"
characters are visible correctly in front, respectively.
Do not install them upside down, horizontally, or at
an angle.
• Install the converter and filter stack on a base made
of metal or other non-flammable material.
Fire may result.
2) Do not place devices or components in front of the
converter. The converter has the display and
operating unit on the front and wiring or
maintenance/inspection requires removing the front
cover.
7) When the converter is running, the temperature of
the heat sink rises to in the vicinity of 90qC. The
mounting surface of the heat sink on the back side of
the converter and filter stack should be made of
material being proof enough against the temperature
rise.
3) Ensure that the minimum clearances and air channels
shown in Figure 3.2-1 are maintained al all time for
ventilation since the converter and filter stack
generate heat during operation.
The generated heat goes up, so do not route cables or
wiring in the space above the converter and filter
stack.
• Prevent lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, metallic
chips, or other foreign materials from getting into
the converter or from accumulating on the heat
sink.
Otherwise, a fire could occur.
• Keep away from the heat sink, filtering resistor,
filtering reactor and boosting reactor because they
become very hot.
Burns may result.
• Do not place flammable objects near the converter
or filter stack.
Fire may result.
C
Table 3.2-1
Exhaust direction
Cooling
fans㻌
E
B
A
Clearances
A
B
C
D
E
Between Rank 3
stacks Rank 4
10
10
300
350
20
From other devices
20
20
--
350
50
(100)
(Unit: mm)
1) Do not install stacks one above the other.
2) In space "C" (above the stack's outlet fans),
only a fuse (authorized by Fuji Electric) can
be mounted.
To mount general devices in the space,
select devices whose maximum operating
temperature is 70qC and mount them so that
they do not interfere with the outlet fans.
3) In space "D" (beneath the stack's inlet), do
not block approximately 60% of the area in
350 mm clearance. To install devices in
space "D," ensure 100 mm clearance.
D
Figure 3.2-1 Mounting Direction and Required
Clearances
3-2
8) There are restrictions on the mounting direction of
the filtering capacitors. For details, refer to the
dimensional drawing of filtering capacitors in
Section 10.4 "Peripheral Devices."
9) Generating loss
For generating loss at each capacity of the converter
unit, filter stack, boosting reactor, filtering reactor
and filtering resistor, refer to Section 10.5
"Generating Loss."
F䠖10䡚135 [mm]
F
F
Figure 3.2-2 Clearances between stacks of Phase-specific stack type
3-3
࣭Mounting method
Rank 3 (132 to 200 kW)
1) The fixation plate of the upper part on the back side
2) The fixation plate of the lower part on the back side
3) The tapped holes for fixing of the upper part on the front side (2×M8-25: In case recommended thickness
of the metal fitting is 2.3mm)
4) The tapped holes for fixing of the lower part on the front side (2×M8-25: In case recommended thickness
of the metal fitting is 2.3mm)
Fixing part 1)
Fixing part 3)
Upper
Metal fitting㻌
Fixing part 4)
Lower
Metal fitting㻌
Fixing part 2)
Figure 3.2-3 The stack mounting method of Rank 3 size (132 to 200 kW)
3-4
Rank4 (220 to 800 kW)
1) The fixation plate of the upper part on the back side
2) The fixation plate of the lower part on the back side
3) The tapped holes for fixing of the upper part on the front side (2×M8-25: In case recommended thickness
of the metal fitting is 2.3mm)
4) The tapped holes for fixing of the lower part on the front side (2×M8-25: In case recommended thickness
of the metal fitting is 2.3mm)
Fixing part 1)
Fixing part 3)
Upper
Metal fitting㻌
㻌
Fixing part 4)
Lower
Metal fitting㻌
Fixing part 2)
Figure 3.2-4 The stack mounting method of Rank 4 size (220 to 800 kW)
3-5
3.3 Connection
3.3.1
General precautions about connection
5)
It takes long time until the smoothing
capacitors of the DC part of the main circuit and
filtering capacitors are discharged. To change
connections after turning the power off, use a
multimeter or the like to check if the DC voltage is
reduced to a safe voltage (within +25 VDC) after the
charge lamp is unlit. Before shorting a circuit, check
that the voltage is reduced to zero; otherwise the
remaining voltage (charge) causes a spark.
• Connect the converter via a circuit protection
circuit breaker or earth leakage breaker to the
power supply.
Fire may result.
• Use the cables of the designated size without fail.
Fire may result.
• Connect the grounding cable without fail.
Electric shock or fire may result.
• Have wiring work done by a qualified electrician.
Electric shock may result.
• Check for power OFF (open circuit) before starting
wiring.
Electric shock may result.
• Install the main body first before starting wiring.
Electric shock or injury may result.
• Do not turn on the product with missing or
dropping parts or transportation damage.
Electric shock or fire may result.
Charge lamp
OFF
1) Be sure to connect the power cables to main circuit
power terminals L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T of the PWM
converter. If the cables are connected to other
terminals, the PWM converter will be broken. Check
if the source voltage is within the allowable voltage
limits specified on the nameplate.
2) Connect the grounding terminal without fail to
prevent electric shock, fire or other disasters and to
reduce noise.
3) Use crimp terminals, which have high connection
reliability, to connect a terminal with a cable.
4) After finishing connections (wiring), check the
following items.
a. Correct connections
b. No missing connections
c. Short circuit between terminals or cables and
grounding fault
Figure 3.3-1
Charge Lamp
• Check if the phases and rated voltage of the product agree with the phases and voltage of the AC power supply.
Injury may result.
• Check that the DC terminals (P (+), N (-)) of the PWM converter are consistent with the polarity (P (+), N (-))
of the DC terminals of the inverter.
Accidents may result.
• Wiring of the PWM converter, filter stack, inverter and motor generates noise. Be careful of malfunction of
nearby sensors and devices.
Accidents may result.
3-6
3.3.2
Terminal functions
Table 3.3-1
Main Circuit Terminals
Converter stack
Terminal symbol
Name
Specification
Main power input
Connect to 3-phase power supply via an exclusive reactor or
the like. For the phase-specific stack, one terminal connects
to one phase (one stack).
P(+), N(-)
Converter output
Connect to the power input terminals P (+) and N (-) of the
inverter.
G
Grounding terminal
Grounding terminal of the chassis (case) of the converter.
R0, T0
Auxiliary control power
input
Connect to the same power system as the main circuit power
supply and backup terminal of the control power supply.
R1, S1, T1
Synchronous power
supply input for voltage
detection
Voltage detection terminal used for the control inside
converter; connect to the power supply of the special filter.
R2, T2
Control monitoring input
Connection terminal for detection of a blown AC fuse.
Connection not required when RHC132S to 315S-4DE is
used.
R3, T3
Fan power input
Connection terminal for AC cooling fan power inside the
stack. Connect to the same power system as the main circuit
power supply.
Main circuit
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T
Circuits across R1-R3 and T1-T3 are shorted with short wires
by factory default. To use the fan power supply individually,
remove the short wires and perform wiring individually.
Check the configuration of the fan power switching
connector. To change the configuration, refer to Section 3.3.5
"Details of connection," (6) Fan power switching connector
(CN UX).
For the details of basic connection diagram and Phase-specific stack, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Basic connection
diagrams" and Section 3.3.5 "Details of connection".
Filter stack (RHF-D series)
Inverter
PWM converter (RHC-D series)
Microswitch for DC
fuse blowout
detection
DCF1
DCF2
㻣㻟
㻸㻝
㻸㼞
㻸㼒
㼁㻜
㻲㼍㼏
㻸㻞
㼂㻜
㻲㼍㼏
㻸㻟
㼃㻜
㻲㼍㼏
㻸㻟㻛㼀
U
Voltage
㻯㼐㼏 detection
V
W
㻵㼀
㻾㼒
㻯㼒
㻣㻟㻙㻞
㻳
㼁㻞
㼁㻝
㻭㻯㻲㻭㻺
㻾㻟
㼀㻟 㼁㻞
㻺㻔㻙㻕
㻺㻔㻙㻕
FAN
㻲㼁㻿㻞
㻱㼐㼏
㻾㻝
㻿㻝
㻣㻟
Base drive
signal
㼀㻝
㻱㼐㼏㻖
㻗
Sequence circuit
(Refer to Section 3.3.4 䇾Basic
connection diagrams.䇿)
AVR: Auto voltage regulator
ACR: Auto current regulator
PWM: Pulse width modulation
fs: Carrier frequency
RUN/STOP
Lr: Boosting reactor
General-purpose terminal
Fac: AC fuse
Alarm reset
Fdc: DC fuse
Common
Edc: DC link bus voltage
Cdc: Capacitor DC voltage
PLC: Programmable logic controller
PLC
52: Magnetic contactor (MC)
73: Magnetic contactor for charging circuit
Ro: Charging resistor
㻣㻟㻭
㻙
㻣㻟㻯
㻭㼂㻾
㽢
㻙
+
Arithmetic
control unit
㻭㻯㻾
㻼㼃㻹
㼒㼟
㻼㻸㻯
㻾㼁㻺
㼄㻝
㻾㻿㼀
㻯㻹
Communications
option
30A
Display and
setting process
30B
Alarm output
30C
Y5A
Y5C
Relay output (Operation
preparation complete)
Y1
Y2
Y3
Keypad
General-purpose
transistor output
㻯㻹㻱
㻭㻻㻝
㻳
Figure 3.3-2
㻳
㼁㻝
Signal output unit
㻾㻝㻝
㻾㻝㻞
㼀㻝㻝
㼀㻝㻞
㻣㻟㻙㻝
㻲㼁㻿㻝
Signal input unit
㻾㻟
㼀㻟
Sequence circuit
(Refer to Section 3.3.4 䇾Basic
connection diagrams.䇿)
Auxiliary
control
Current
㼀㻜 power
detection
input
㻸㻝㻛㻾
㻵㻾
㻸㻞㻛㻿
㻵㻿
㻼㻔㻗㻕
㻾㻜
㻸㻢
㻡㻞
DCF2
㻲㼐㼏
㻼㻔㻗㻕
Communication
processing unit
Microswitch for AC
fuse blowout
detection
3
Power MCCB or
supply RCD/ELCB
㻾㻜
㻸㻠
㻸㻡
DCF1
㻹
General-purpose
analog output
Basic Circuit Configuration and Terminals (When no filter stack is used)
3-7
M
Table 3.3-2
Control Terminals
Converter stack
Item
Name
RUN/STOP command
[RUN]
Connect across RUN and CM to boost the voltage, or disconnect to stop.
Alarm reset command
[RST]
After removing the cause of the alarm upon alarm stop, connect across
RST and CM to cancel protection and restart operation.
General-purpose
transistor input
Specifications
[X1]
Input signals
Digital input circuit specification
Item
ON level
OFF level
Operating current at ON
Allowable leakage
current at OFF
Operating
voltage
min.
0V
22 V
-
typ.
22 V
3.2 mA
max.
2V
27 V
4.5 mA
-
-
0.5 mA
+24V
PLC
6.8k䃈
RUN,X1,RST
CM
0V
PLC signal power
supply
[PLC]
Connect the power supply of the PLC output signals. (Rated voltage 24 (22 to
27) VDC)
Digital input common
[CM]
Common terminal for digital input signals
Alarm output
[30A]
[30B]
[30C]
Signal is output upon alarm stop after the protective function of the converter
is activated.
(Contact: 1C. Upon alarm, ON across 30A and 30C)
(Contact capacity: 250 VAC 0.3A cos T = 0.3)
General-purpose
transistor output
(Standard: 3 points)
[Y1]
[Y2]
[Y3]
Output signals
Transistor output circuit specification
Item
Operating ON level
voltage
OFF level
Max. load current at ON
Leakage current at OFF
min.
-
typ.
1V
24 V
-
max.
2V
27 V
50 mA
0.1 mA
Y1-Y3
28-30V
CME
Digital output
common
[CME]
Common terminal for transistor output signals. Isolated from terminals CM.
Relay output
(Standard: 1 point)
[Y5A]
[Y5C]
Signal can be selected similarly to Y1 to Y3 terminals.
The contact capacity is the same as that of the batch alarm output.
General-purpose
analog output
[AO1]
Outputs monitor signals of analog DC voltage (0 to ±10 VDC).
Analog output
common
[M]
Common terminal for analog output terminals
Charging circuit
control output
[73A]
[73C]
Output for controlling external charging circuit
Connect the electromagnetic contactor included in standard accessories.
(Contact capacity: 250 VAC 5A max.)
3-8
3.3.3
Terminal layout drawing
(1) Main circuit terminals
Unit: mm
Figure 3.3-3 (a) RHC132S to 200S-4DE (Rank 3)
3-9
Select terminal screws so that a clearance
of at least 10 mm with respect to the frame
can be created.
Figure 3.3-3 (b) RHC220S to 315S-4DE (Rank 4)
3-10
Unit: mm
Select terminal screws so that a clearance
of at least 10 mm with respect to the frame
can be created.
Figure 3.3-3 (c) RHC630B to 800B-4DE S-PHASE (Rank 4)
3-11
Unit: mm
Select terminal screws so that a clearance
of at least 10 mm with respect to the frame
can be created.
Figure 3.3-3 (d) RHC630B to 800B-4DE R/T-PHASE (Rank 4)
3-12
Unit: mm
(2) Control circuit terminals
Screw size: M3
Screw size: M4
Figure 3.3-4
RHC…S-4DE
3-13
3.3.4
Basic connection diagrams
Depending upon the converter capacity and the inverter to be used in combination, the wiring method of the filtering
circuit and sequencer differs. In the table below, select the appropriate basic connection diagram and perform wiring
with correct connection sequence and correct polarity. For details of wiring of each section, refer to Section 3.3.5
"Details of Connection."
Basic
connection
diagram
#1
Filtering circuit
Filter stack (*1)
RHF160S-4DE
to RHF355S-4DE
#2
Configured in
peripheral device
PWM converter
MD(CT) mode: RHC132S-4DE to RHC315S-4DE
LD(VT) mode: RHC132S-4DE to RHC315S-4DE
MD(CT) mode: RHC630B-4DE to RHC800B-4DE
LD(VT) mode: RHC630B-4DE to RHC800B-4DE
No. of
converters
1
Inverter
Stack type
3
*3 stacks
Stack type
= 1 set
(*1) Contact Fuji Electric if using a peripheral device (73, Fac, Lr, Rf, Lf, Cf) other than a filter stack.
3-14
Basic connection diagram #1
„ RHC132S-4DE to RHC315S-4DE in MD(CT) mode
„ RHC132S-4DE to RHC315S-4DE in LD(VT) mode
㻸㻠
㻹㼕㼏㼞㼛㻌㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔㻌
㼒㼛㼞㻌㼐㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌
㻭㻯㻌㼒㼡㼟㼑㻌㼎㼘㼛㼣
㻼㼃㻹㻌㼏㼛㼚㼢㼑㼞㼠㼑㼞㻌㼟㼠㼍㼏㼗
㻾㻴㻯㻙㻰㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟
㻲㼕㼘㼠㼑㼞㻌㼟㼠㼍㼏㼗
㻾㻴㻲㻙㻰㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟
㻾㻜
㻣㻟
㻵㼚㼢㼑㼞㼠㼑㼞㻌㼟㼠㼍㼏㼗
㼂㻳㻝㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟
㻹㼕㼏㼞㼛㻌㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔㻌
㼒㼛㼞㻌㼐㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌
㻰㻯㻌㼒㼡㼟㼑㻌㼎㼘㼛㼣
㻸㻡
㻰㻯㻲㻝
㻸㻢
㼗
㻰㻯㻲㻞
㼘
㻸㼞
㻸㼒
㻸㻝
㼁㻜
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌
㼟㼡㼜㼜㼘㼥
㻲㼍㼏
㻸㻞
㼂㻜
㻲㼍㼏
㻸㻟
㼃㻜
㻲㼍㼏
㻡㻞
㻾㼒
㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻤㻕
㼕
㼖
㻸㻟㻛㼀
㻝
㼁㻝
㼁㻞
㻭㻯㻲㻭㻺
㻾㻝㻝
㻾㻝㻞
㼀㻝㻝 㻲㼁㻿㻞
㼀㻝㻞
㻣㻟㻙㻝
㻯㻹
㻻㻺㻭
㻻㻺㻮
㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚
㼜㼞㼑㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻣㻟
㻣㻟
㻻㻺㻯
㻾㻰㼅
㻡㻞㻭
㻾㻰㼅
㼏
㼐
㻾㻰㼅
㻡㻞㻭
㻡㻞
㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻥㻕
㼏
㼐
㻡㻞㼀
㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻡㻕
㻣㻟㼀
㼙
㼚
㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻡㻞
㻡㻞㼀
㼕
㼖
㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻝㻕
㼅㻡㻭
㼅㻡㻯
㼑
㼒
㼙
㼚
㼓
㼔
㻳
㻣㻟
㻡㻞
㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻞㻕
㼍
㼎
㻹
㼂
㻺㻔㻙㻕
㻺㻔㻙㻕
㻟㻜㻭
㻟㻜㻮
㻟㻜㻯
㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻝㻜㻕
㻞㻜㻜㼂㻛㻡㻜㻴㼦
㻞㻞㻜㼂㻛㻢㻜㻴㼦
㼁
㼃
㼄㻝㻔㼀㻴㻾㻕
㻞
㼓
㼔 㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻟㻕
㻼㻔㻗㻕
㻸㻞㻛㻿
㻲㼁㻿㻝
㻣㻟㻙㻞
㻲㼐㼏
㻼㻔㻗㻕
㼗㻌㼘
㻯㼒
㻾㻟
㼀㻟
㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻣㻕
㻸㻝㻛㻾
㻰㻯㻲㻝
㻰㻯㻲㻞
㻡㻞㼀
㻾㼁㻺
㻲㼄
㻾㼁㻺
㼍
㼎
㻾㻟
㼀㻟
㻾㻝
㻿㻝
㼀㻝
㻾㻜
㼀㻜
㻣㻟㻭
㻣㻟㻯
㻾㼁㻺
㻾㻿㼀
㻯㻹
㻳
㻾㻜
㼀㻜
㻾㻝
㼀㻝
㻲㼃㻰
㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻢㻕
㼄㻥㻔㼀㻴㻾㻕 㻯㻹
㻯㻹
㻟㻜㻭
㻟㻜㻮
㻟㻜㻯
㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻠㻕
㼑㻌㼒
㻲㼄
㻝㻟
㻝㻞
㻝㻝
㻳
㻿㼠㼛㼜
㻾㼁㻺
㻲㼄
Symbol
Lr
Lf
Cf
Rf
R0
Fac
Fdc
73
52
Part name of accessory
Boosting reactor
Filtering reactor
Filtering capacitor
Filtering resistor
Charging resistor
AC fuse
DC fuse
Magnetic contactor for charging circuit
Magnetic contactor for power supply
(Note 1) Connect a step-down transformer to lower the voltage of the sequence circuit to voltage shown by figure.
(Note 2) Connect the auxiliary power supply input terminals (R0 and T0) of the PWM converter and inverter to the main
power supply via the normally closed contact of the magnetic contactor (52) for the charging circuit without fail.
For application to a non-grounded power supply, insert an insulated transformer.
(Note 3) The power of the inverter's AC fan is supplied from terminals R1 and T1, so connect it to the main power supply
without passing it through the normally closed contact of 52.
(Note 4) Configure a sequence where preparation for operation of the PWM converter is arranged first before operation
signals are issued to the inverter.
(Note 5) Set the timer of 52T at 1 sec.
(Note 6) When using microswitches for detection of an AC fuse blowout, assign the X1 terminal of the PWM converter to
an external alarm (THR) and connect microswitches in series.
(Note 7) Connect cables to the L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R1, S1 and T1 terminals in the correct phase order without fail.
(Note 8) When supplying 200 VAC for the fan power supply, remove the short wires from terminals R11 and R12 and
from T11 and T12, and then connect it to terminals R12 and T12. These terminals are used only for internal AC
fans. Do not use for other uses.
(Note 9) When using filter stack RHF-D series, be sure to configure a sequence which uses 73T. Set the timer of 73T at
1sec.
(Note 10) To use the fan power supply individually, remove the short wires from terminals R1 and R3 and from T1 and
T3, and then connect it to terminals R3 and T3.
3-15
Basic connection diagram #2
„ RHC630B-4DE to RHC800B-4DE in MD(CT) mode㻌
„ RHC630B-4DE to RHC800B-4DE in LD(VT) mode
630㹼800kW Stack type inverter (Phase-specific stack) is consist of three set of Standard stacks of RANK 4 size.
In addition to the example of connection of the above-mentioned standard stack, you need connection between each
stacks. The example of connection is shown below
㻼㼃㻹㻌㻯㼛㼚㼢㼑㼞㼠㼑㼞㻌㻿㼠㼍㼏㼗
㻾㻴㻯㻙㻰㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟
㻾㻙㻼㻴㻭㻿㻱㻌 㻰㻯㻲㻝
㻿㼠㼍㼏㼗
㻸㻝㻛㻾
㻾㻜
㻰㻯㻲㻞
㻺㻔㻙㻕
㻼㻔㻗㻕
㻳
㻺㻔㻙㻕
㻯㼀㼁
㻯㻺㻥㻢
㻯㻺㻡㻝
㻯㻺㻢㻝
㻯㻺㻣㻝
㻯㻺㻝㻢
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻜
㻯㼀㻾
㻸㼞
㻲㼍㼏
㼚㼕
㼍
㻹
㻸㼒
㻲㼐㼏
㻼㻔㻗㻕
㻳
㻯㻺㻥㻢
㻯㻺㻡㻝
㻯㻺㻢㻝
㻯㻺㻣㻝
㻯㻺㻝㻢
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻜
㻡㻞㻙㻝䡚㻡㻞㻙㻟
㻣㻟
㻵㼚㼢㼑㼞㼠㼑㼞㻌㻿㼠㼍㼏㼗
㼂㻳㻝㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟
㻰㻯㻲㻝 㼁㻙㻼㻴㻭㻿㻱㻌
㻿㼠㼍㼏㼗 㼁
㻰㻯㻲㻞
㼠㼡
㼜㼚
㻵
㼞
㼑
㼣
㼛
㼜
㼏
㼐
㼓
㼔 㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻟㻕
㻡㻞㼀
㻡㻞㻙㻝 㻡㻞㻙㻞 㻡㻞㻙㻟
㻡㻞㼀
㻾㼁㻺
㻢㻲
㻝㻟
㻝㻞
㻝㻝
㻳
㻾㼁㻺
㼀㻙㻼㻴㻭㻿㻱㻌 㻰㻯㻲㻝
㻿㼠㼍㼏㼗
㻰㻯㻲㻞
㻲㼄
㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻡㻕
㻸㻟㻛㼀
㻼㻔㻗㻕
㻳
㻺㻔㻙㻕
Symbol
Lr
Lf
Cf
Rf
R0
Fac
Fdc
73
52
6F
㻰㻯㻲㻝
㻲㼐㼏
㻰㻯㻲㻞
㻯㼀㼃
㻡㻞㻭
㻲㼃㻰
㻯㻹
㻯㻺㻥㻢
㻯㻺㻡㻝
㻯㻺㻢㻝
㻯㻺㻣㻝
㻯㻺㻝㻢
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻝
㻣㻟
㻾㻜
㼀㻜
㻾㻝
㼀㻝
㼄㻥㻔㼀㻴㻾㻕
㻯㻹
㻟㻜㻭
㻟㻜㻮
㻟㻜㻯
㻿㼠㼛㼜
㻡㻞㻙㻟
㻡㻞㻙㻟
㻾㻰㼅
㼍
㼎
㻯㼀㼀
㻢㻲
㻡㻞㻙㻞
㻡㻞㻙㻞
㼕
㼖
㼓
㼔
㻹
㼑㻌㼒㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻠㻕
㻲㼄
㻯㻺㻝㻜
㻯㻺㻞㻟
㻯㻺㻥㻠
㻡㻞㻙㻝
㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚 㻲㼄
㼂
㻯㻺㻣㻝
㻡㻞㻙㻝
㼑
㼒
㻯㻺㻝㻥
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻝
㻡㻞㻭
㻯㻺㻣㻝
㻡㻞㼀
㻳
㻾㻿㼀
㻯㻹
㼂㻙㻼㻴㻭㻿㻱㻌
㻿㼠㼍㼏㼗
㻰㻯㻲㻞
㻼㻔㻗㻕
㻺㻔㻙㻕
㻯㻺㻤
㻯㻺㻞㻟
㻯㻺㻥㻠
㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻝㻕
㻾㻰㼅
㼏
㼐
㻰㻯㻲㻝
㻲㼐㼏
㻟㻜㻭 㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻢㻕
㻟㻜㻮
㻟㻜㻯
㻯㻺㻥㻢
㻯㻺㻡㻝
㻯㻺㻢㻝
㻯㻺㻣㻝
㻯㻺㻝㻢
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻝
㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻾㻰㼅
㻼㼞㼑㼜㼍㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚
㼍
㼎
㻾㼁㻺
㼕 㼖
㻯㻺㻝㻥
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻝
㻞㻞㻜㼂
㼛㼞㻌㼘㼑㼟㼟
㻡㻞
㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻞㻕
㼅㻡㻭
㼅㻡㻯
㻯㻺㻡㻝
㻯㼒㻞
㻰㻯㻲㻝
㻰㻯㻲㻞
㻼㻔㻗㻕
㻺㻔㻙㻕
㻯㻺㻤
㻯㻺㻞㻞
㻯㻺㻥㻟
㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻤㻕
㻯㼒㻝
㻿㻙㻼㻴㻭㻿㻱㻌
㻿㼠㼍㼏㼗
㻸㻞㻛㻿
㻾㻞
㼀㻞
㻾㻟
㼀㻟
㻾㻝
㻿㻝
㼀㻝
㻾㻜
㼀㻜
㻣㻟㻭
㻣㻟㻯
㻾㼁㻺
㻯㻺㻝㻣
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻜
㻾㼒
㻯㻺㻡㻝
㻲㼍㼏
㻢㻲
㻯㻺㻞㻞
㻯㻺㻥㻟
㻯㻺㻝㻣
㻯㻺㻝㻜㻜
㻔㻺㼛㼠㼑㻣㻕
㼃㻙㻼㻴㻭㻿㻱㻌
㻿㼠㼍㼏㼗
㻼㻔㻗㻕
㼃
㻺㻔㻙㻕
㻳
Part name of accessory
Boosting reactor
Filtering reactor
Filtering capacitor
Filtering resistor
Charging resistor
AC fuse
DC fuse
Magnetic contactor for charging circuit
Magnetic contactor for power supply
Magnetic contactor for filtering circuit
(Note 1) Connect a step-down transformer to reduce the voltage of the sequence circuit to 220 V or below.
(Note 2) Connect the auxiliary power supply input terminals (R0 and T0) of the PWM converter and inverter to the main
power supply via the normally closed contact of the magnetic contactor (52) for the power supply circuit without
fail. For application to a non-grounded power supply, insert an insulated transformer.
(Note 3) The power of the inverter's AC fan is supplied from terminals R1 and T1, so connect it to the main power supply
without passing it through the normally closed contact of 52.
(Note 4) Configure a sequence where preparation for operation of the PWM converter is arranged first before operation
signals are issued to the inverter.
(Note 5) Set the timer of 52T at 1 sec.
(Note 6) Assign any of the X1 through X9 terminals of the inverter stack to an external alarm (THR).
(Note 7) Connect cables to the L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1 and T1 terminals in the correct phase order without fail.
(Note 8) To use the fan power supply individually, remove the short wires from terminals R1 and R3 and from T1 and
T3, and then connect it to terminals R3 and T3.
3-16
3.3.5
Details of connection
Connect (1) Main power supply circuit, (2) DC link circuit, (3) Grounding circuit, (4) Control circuit, (5) Auxiliary
control power input circuit in this order.
For the cable size, refer to Section 3.3.7 "Cable Size Applicable to Main Circuit."
• Check that the power is turned off (with open circuit) before conducting wiring.
Electric shock may result.
• Do not turn on the converter with missing or dropping parts or damage given during transportation.
Electric shock or fire may result.
• Check that the phases and rated voltage of the product agree with the phases and voltage of the AC power
supply.
Injury may result.
• Keep consistency in the polarity between the DC power supply terminals P (+) and N (-) of the converter and
the main circuit DC terminals P (+) and N (-) of the inverter.
Fire may result.
• The PN wiring length to the DC link bus terminal must not exceed 5 m.
Fire may result.
(1) Main circuit power supply input terminals (L1/R, L2/S and L3/T)
RHC132S to 315S-4D (Filter stack)
Connect the L1/R, L2/S and L3/T main circuit power supply terminals to the U0, V0 and W0 terminals of the
dedicated filter stack.
RHC630B to 800B-4D (Peripheral devices)
Connect the L1/R, L2/S and L3/T main circuit power supply terminals via AC fuses, boosting reactors, filtering
circuits, magnetic contactors (52) for the power supply, MCCB or RCD/ELCB to the power supply as shown in
Figure 3.3-5.
Main power supply
input terminal
Circuit
breake
r
Boosting
reactor
AC fuse
R1
S1
T1
Power
supply
52
Reactor for
harmonic filter
L1/R L2/S L3/T
Resistor for harmonic filter
Control terminal
Capacitor for harmonic filter
Figure 3.3-5
Connection of Main Circuit Power Supply
3-17
a) The wiring distance between the capacitor for harmonic filter and power supply line must not exceed 5 m.
Note: Otherwise the wiring inductance deteriorates the effect of the filter.
Main power supply
L1/R L2/S L3/T
input terminal
Ld5m
Boosting
reactor
Resistor for harmonic filter
Capacitor for harmonic filter
Figure 3.3-6 Wiring Length of Filtering Capacitor
b) Connection of filtering resistor
Since a filtering resistor generates heat, install it at a place where other devices are not subject to the heat. Note
that the wiring length should be 5 m or less.
• Connect the reactor for harmonic filter and boosting reactor in correct positions.
Fire may result.
Note: There is danger of a broken converter.
c) When connecting the reactor for harmonic filter, do not make a mistake in the positions of the reactor for
harmonic filter, resistor for harmonic filter, capacitor for harmonic filter and boosting reactor.
Main power
supply input L1/R L2/S L3/T
terminal
Reactor for
harmonic filter
Boosting
reactor
R1
S1
T1
Power supply
52
Resistor for harmonic filter
Control terminal
Figure 3.3-7
Capacitor for harmonic filter
Connection of Reactor
3-18
d) Connect an electromagnetic contactor (MC) for power supply so that the converter or inverter can be disconnected
from the power supply upon activation of the protective function to prevent the failure or accident from
propagating.
Reactor for
harmonic filter
Circuit
breaker
Control power
supply terminal
Figure 3.3-8
R1
S1
T1
52
R0
T0
Power supply
Main power supply
L1/R L2/S L3/T
input terminal
Control
terminal
Connection of Magnetic Contactor
• Never connect a DC reactor.
Fire may result.
Note: Otherwise the voltage of the DC circuit resonates to become unstable, possibly resulting in breakage of
equipment.
3-19
(2) Converter output terminals (P(+), N(-))
Connect the converter output terminals (P(+) and N(-)) to the inverter DC input P(+) and N(-). The premise is that
this connection uses busbars. When using wires for connection, however, keep the wiring length between stacks
within 2 m. When using wires for connection to the PN branch bars or PN branch terminals, keep the wiring length
within 2 m and put the wires close together (or twist them together).
Put close together
Within 2 m
between stacks
Use identical
wires.
DCF
Converter
stack
PN busbar
Inverter
stack
Put close together
Within
2m
PN branch bar
(PN branch terminal)
Within
2m
DCF
Converter
stack
Figure 3.3-10
Inverter
stack
Restrictions on Using Wires for Connection to PN Terminals
(3) Grounding circuit
• Be sure to connect the grounding terminal E (G).
Fire may result.
Be sure to connect the grounding terminal E (G) of the PWM converter and that of the filter stack for safety and
noise reduction.
From the view of noise reduction, a low circuit impedance is necessary to suppress noise generation and reduce
mutual effects on pieces of equipment. Therefore connect a thick and short cable from the grounding terminal to the
grounding electrode prepared in common with the inverter system.
3-20
(4) Control circuit
In general, the covers of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage (i.e.,
reinforced insulation is not applied). Therefore, if a control signal wire comes into direct contact with a live
conductor of the main circuit, the insulation of the cover might break down, which would expose the signal wire
to a high voltage of the main circuit. Make sure that the control signal wires will not come into contact with live
conductors of the main circuit.
Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock or an accident.
• Noise generates from the converter, inverter, motor and cables. Be careful of malfunction of nearby sensors and
devices.
Accidents may result.
• Take care of the polarity of the external power supply.
Failure may result.
Notes:
- Do not add voltage to control terminals other than control terminals Y5A, Y5C, 30A, 30B, 30C, 73A and 73C.
Otherwise the converter will be broken.
- The common terminals CM and CME are isolated from each other. Do not connect across these terminals.
Otherwise mutual interference of circuits may cause malfunction. As well, do not ground the common terminal.
a) R1, S1 and T1 terminals
The R1, S1 and T1 terminals serve as input terminals of reference signals of the converter. Connect these
terminals to the power supply side of a reactor for harmonic filter free from waveform distortion. The wiring
length must not exceed 5 m.
Reactor for
harmonic filter
Circuit
breaker
Control power
supply terminal
Figure 3.3-11
52
R1
S1
T1
R0
T0
Power supply
Main power supply
L1/R L2/S L3/T
input terminal
Control
terminal
Connection of Voltage Detection Terminals
3-21
b) Digital input terminals (RUN, X1, RST, PLC and CM)
1) Normally a circuit across the digital input terminal and the CM terminal is connected or disconnected. On the
other hand, if the open collector output of a programmable logic controller driven by an external power supply is
used to turn on or off, a routing circuit may cause malfunction.
If this happens, use a PLC terminal to connect as shown in Figure 3.3-12.
2) When using a contact input, use a contact free from contact faults having high contact reliability.
Example: Fuji Electric's control relay HH54PW
Programmable
logic controller
Converter
PLC
RUN, X1, RST
24 VDC
CM
External
power
supply
Figure 3.3-12
Prevention of Routing Caused by External Power Supply
c) Transistor output terminals (Y1, Y2, Y3 and CME)
1) Take care of the polarity of the external power supply.
2) When connecting a control relay, connect a surge absorbing diode at both ends of the exciting coil.
d) Contact output terminals (Y5A, Y5C, 30A, 30B and 30C)
Contact capacity is 250 VAC 0.3A cos T = 0.3. If these specification values are exceeded, connect a relay having a
larger contact capacity. If two or more contacts are necessary, connect a relay having multiple contacts to increase
contacts.
30C
30B
30A
30
Contacts
Contact
output
X
Power supply
Figure 3.3-13
Increase in Contact Capacity and Number of Contacts
e) Charging circuit control signals (73A and 73C)
These are control output signals for the charging circuit. Perform wiring, referring to the basic connection
diagrams.
f) Charging circuit drive input (73-1 and 73-2)
These are control input signals for the charging circuit. Perform wiring, referring to the basic connection
diagrams.
3-22
g) Connection of surge absorber
When an exciting coil of an electromagnetic contactor, relay or the like in the control circuit or periphery circuit
of the converter is opened or closed, surge voltage (noise) generates according to a steep change of the current.
This surge voltage may cause malfunction of the converter control circuit or peripheral devices. If this happens,
connect a surge absorber at both ends of the faulty coil.
AC
Exciting
coil
X
+
S2-A-O
or
S1-B-O
DC
Y
S2-A-O
or
S1-B-O
Diode
-
Figure 3.3-14
Z
Connection of Surge Absorber
3-23
h) Wiring for control circuit
1) Route the control circuit wiring along the left-hand side of the converter as shown in Figure 3.3-15.
2) Route the auxiliary control power input wiring and auxiliary fan power input wiring along the right-hand side of
the converter as shown in Figure 3.3-15.
Note: For wires to be connected to the control circuit terminals, use shielded wires or twisted vinyl wires.
Control terminals
Control circuit wiring
Auxiliary control power input
wiring
Auxiliary fan power input
wiring
Figure 3.3-15
Routes of Control Circuit Wiring
3-24
i)Wiring between stacks of Phase-specific stack type
In case of Phase-specific stack type (RHC630-800B-4DE), you need to wire between each stacks after installation
the inverters. Refer to Figure3.3-16㹼3.3-18.
53+$6(
63+$6(
73+$6(
Figure3.3-16 Wiring between GATE P.C.B, FUSE P.C.B and POWER P.C.B of Phase-specific stack type
3-25
$
53+$6(
63+$6(
73+$6(
Figure3.3-17 Wiring between AUXILIARY POWER P.C.B ,CT(current detector) cable of Phase-specific stack type.
Figure3.3-18 Detail of A that is wiring route of CT cable of Phase-specific stack type.
3-26
(5) Auxiliary control power supply circuit
• To apply to inverters belonging to group A, C, or E shown in Table 3.3-3, connect the control power auxiliary
input (R0 and T0) through the b contact of an electromagnetic contactor (52).
Fire may result.
Note: The energy of the boosting reactor may obstruct the control power supply circuit through the source circuit
during converter operation, possibly causing an overheated or burned control power supply circuit. Be sure to
connect through the b contact of the electromagnetic contactor (52) to the main power supply.
The wiring pattern of the R0 and T0, R1 and T1 terminals to the inverter varies according to the applicable inverter.
As listed below, perform wiring according to the applicable inverter groups.
Table 3.3-3 Wiring Method to R0/T0/R1/T1 Terminal
Applicable inverter
FRN30SVG1S-4
to FRN75SVG1S-4
R0 and T0 terminal wiring method
Insert b contact of the contactor (52) in
the wiring of R0 and T0.
R1 and T1 terminal wiring method
No R1 or T1 terminal
Refer to the basic connection
diagrams given in Section 3.3.4.
FRN90SVG1S-4 or above
The converter operates even if the power is not supplied to the control power supply auxiliary input (R0 and T0)
terminals. If the power supply electromagnetic contactor of the converter is turned off (with an open circuit) after the
protective circuit is activated, the control circuit of the converter is turned off, too, to stop alarm warning outputs
(30A, 30B and 30C) and cancel alarm display. To prevent this, supply the same AC voltage as that of the main circuit
power supply to the control power supply auxiliary input (R0 and T0) terminals.
• Precautions for application to non-grounded power supply
If the converter is connected to a non-grounded power supply, a grounding fault accident occurring at the inverter
output configures a routing circuit via the ground, causing breakage of the inverter.
To connect to the non-grounding power supply without possibility of breakage, connect an insulated transformer
between the power supply and R0 and T0 for each of the converter and inverter. In this case, there is no need to
insert the normally closed contact of 52 relay.
Connection of an insulated transformer is also recommended for an unknown power supply.
Choose the capacity of the transformer according to the capacity requirements of the converter and inverter, based on
the table below.
Model
Capacity of
transformer
RHC
200VA
Model
Capacity of
transformer
SVG1
200VA
VG1
G1
150VA
200VA
300VA
Applicable converter
RHC132S-4DE㹼RHC315S-4DE
RHC630B-4DE㹼RHC800B-4DE
Applicable inverter
FRN30SVG1S-4E㹼FRN315SVG1S-4E
FRN630BVG1S-4E㹼FRN800BVG1S-4E
FRN22VG1S-4 or below
FRN30VG1S-4㹼FRN220VG1S-4
FRN280VG1S-4㹼FRN630VG1S-4
3-27
(6) Fan power switching connector (CN UX)
Table 3.3-4 Main Circuit Source Voltage Requiring
Configuration Change of Fan Power
Switching Connector
When the main circuit source voltage is within the
range shown in Table 3.3-4, set the auxiliary power
switching connector "CN UX" on the U2 position. In
other cases, leave it on the U1 position (factory default).
For detailed switching instructions, see Figure 3.3-20.
Frequency (Hz)
Source voltage range (V)
50
380 to 398
60
380 to 430
Some inverters are equipped with similar auxiliary
power switching connector "CN UX." For them, change
the connector position in the same way. For detailed
switching procedure, refer to the inverter's instruction
manual.
The switching connectors are located on the power printed circuit board located above the
control printed circuit board as shown in the figure at the right.
CN UX
Note: To remove each of the jumpers, pinch its upper part of the tab between your fingers,
unlock it, and pull it up.
When mounting the jumper, fit it over the connector until it snaps into place.
<Enlarged view A>
Fan power switching
connector (CN UX)
U1 U2
Auxiliary control power
input terminal
R0 T0
The factory default position of CN UX is U1.
A
<Detail odd angle view A>
CN UX (red)
F t
Factory
default
d f lt
(CN UX: U1)
Jumper removed from
the connector
Figure 3.3-20
Power Switching Connector
3-28
After switching
(CN UX: U2)
3.3.6
Precautions for installation
(1) The circuit breaker on the power supply side may trip according to some failures of the converter.
In such a case, the auxiliary power supply is also turned off and the failure is not retained. When the circuit
breaker is turned on to turn on the contactor, the breakage inside the converter may propagate.
To prevent this kind of trouble from propagating, it is recommended to retain the alarm signal of the converter
in an electrically reset relay.
Inverter
PWM converter
30A
30A
30B
RUN
30C
30B
CM
FX
Y5A
CM
THR
30X
30C
RUN
30A
30A
30C
30C
FWD
CM
Y5C
Operation
preparation
30A
30C
Operation
52
30
Reset
30X
30
52
RUN
FX
S
R
30X
The circuit without an electrically reset relay is shown below.
Inverter
PWM converter
30A
RUN
RUN
CM
30A
30B
THR
30C
CM
Y5A
30B
30B
30C
30C
FWD
FX
CM
Y5C
Operation
preparation
52
Operation
30B
30C
52
Figure 3.3-21
RUN
FX
Precautions for installation
(2) Because a high frequency current flows through the boosting reactor, the reactor itself generates slight
electromagnetic noise.
(3) Be sure to connect to a power supply rated at larger than the power supply capacity requirement specified in
Section 10.1 "Standard Specifications."
(If the power supply capacity is too small, the converter and/or inverter may be broken due to distortion of
waveform of the power supply.)
Among all, problems may arise if the power supply boosted with a small capacity transformer is used for the
main circuit power supply for the sequence check of the control panel. In this case, disconnect the circuit across
RUN and CM of the converter and perform the sequence check of other parts without operating the converter.
3-29
3.3.7
Tightening torque and wire size for devices applicable to the main circuit
(1) Tightening torque
Converter stack
Type
Tightening torque (N•m)
RHC…-4DE
[R0, T0]
Grounding [R1, S1, T1]
[DCF1,
Input circuit
Output circuit
[R2, T2]
terminals
DCF2]
[L1/R, L2/S, L3/T] [P(+), N(-)]
[ G]
[R3, T3]
[73A, 73C]
Control terminals
M3 screw M4 screw
132S
160S
200S
220S
280S
48
48
48
1.8
0.5
0.7
1.2
315S
630B
710B
800B
(2) Recommended wire size
Converter stack (Ambient temperature: 40°C)
RHC…-4DE
MD(CT) LD(VT)
mode
mode
Main power input
[L1/R L2/S, L3/T],
Converter output
[P(+), N(-)]
Control
[R0, T0]
Grounding Filtering Charging
[R1, S1, T1] terminals
resistor
terminals resistor
[R2, T2]
[DCF1,
circuit
circuit
[
G]
Bus bar Wire sizes Bus bar Wire sizes
[R3, T3]
DCF2]
sizes
sizes
[73A, 73C]
2
2
2
(mm2)
(mm2)
(mm2)
(mm2)
(mm )
(mm )
(mm )
(mm2)
(mm2)
132S
-
160S
132S
200S
160S
-
200S
220S
-
280S
-
315S
280S
-
315S
325
630B
-
325×2
710B
630B
800B
710B
-
800B
60
t5×30
(150)
100
t4×40
(160)
150
60
22
100
38
150
60
t10×30
(300)
t10×125
(1250)
200
250
325×3
325×4
t8×50
(400)
-
-
200
2
250
325
1.25
100
60
t8×50
(400)
-
325×5
150
100
3.5
200
(Note 1) The wire size in the above table is for the 600 V HIV insulated wires.
(Note 2) The size of wire or bus bar of stack by phase is a part for 1 phase (1 stack).
(3) Rated current of Cu bus bars
͆Table 3.3-5” shows the rated currents of bus bars. However, if the ambient temperature of the cabinet is lower
than 40°C and in some other cases, the derating of the current must be considered.
[Precaution about the application of the current and capacity table of bus bars]
Select a bus bar based on a temperature of 70°C, which means a temperature rise of 30 K from an ambient
temperature of 40°C. If ambient temperature drops below 40°C, the value of temperature rise increases. Consider
a correction factor according to “Figure 3.3-22 Temperature correction factor.” In addition, the reduction rate of
3-30
the supplied current depends on the layout of bus bars. When supplying a large current, plan the current by
making reference to Figure 3.3-23
Figure 3.3-22 Temperature correction factor
Figure 3.3-23 Derating in installation direction (reference)
Table 3.3-5 Rated currents of CU bus bars
㻰㼕㼙㼑㼚㼟㼕㼛㼚㻌㼇㼙㼙㼉
㼀㼔㼕㼏㼗㼚㼑㼟㼟
㻟
㻠
㻡
㻢
㻤
㻝㻜
㻝㻞
㻝㻡
(Note)
㼃㼕㼐㼠㼔
㻝㻡
㻞㻜
㻞㻡
㻟㻜
㻞㻡
㻟㻜
㻠㻜
㻞㻡
㻟㻜
㻠㻜
㻡㻜
㻢㻜
㻣㻡
㻞㻡
㻟㻜
㻠㻜
㻡㻜
㻢㻜
㻣㻡
㻤㻜
㻝㻜㻜
㻞㻡
㻟㻜
㻠㻜
㻡㻜
㻢㻜
㻣㻡
㻤㻜
㻝㻜㻜
㻟㻜
㻠㻜
㻡㻜
㻢㻜
㻣㻡
㻤㻜
㻝㻜㻜
㻝㻞㻡
㻝㻡㻜
㻝㻞㻡
㻝㻡㻜
㻝㻜㻜
㻝㻡㻜
㻝㻣㻡
㻞㻜㻜
㻺㼛㼠㻌㼜㼍㼞㼍㼘㼘㼑㼘
㻯㼞㼛㼟㼟㻌㼟㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼇㼙㼙㻞㼉
㻠㻡
㻢㻜
㻣㻡
㻥㻜
㻝㻜㻜
㻝㻞㻜
㻝㻢㻜
㻝㻞㻡
㻝㻡㻜
㻞㻜㻜
㻞㻡㻜
㻟㻜㻜
㻟㻣㻡
㻝㻡㻜
㻝㻤㻜
㻞㻠㻜
㻟㻜㻜
㻟㻢㻜
㻠㻡㻜
㻠㻤㻜
㻢㻜㻜
㻞㻜㻜
㻞㻠㻜
㻟㻞㻜
㻠㻜㻜
㻠㻤㻜
㻢㻜㻜
㻢㻠㻜
㻤㻜㻜
㻟㻜㻜
㻠㻜㻜
㻡㻜㻜
㻢㻜㻜
㻣㻡㻜
㻤㻜㻜
㻝㻜㻜㻜
㻝㻞㻡㻜
㻝㻡㻜㻜
㻝㻡㻜㻜
㻝㻤㻜㻜
㻝㻡㻜㻜
㻞㻞㻡㻜
㻞㻢㻞㻡
㻟㻜㻜㻜
㻰㻯
㻝㻤㻜
㻞㻞㻡
㻞㻣㻡
㻟㻞㻜
㻟㻞㻡
㻟㻤㻜
㻠㻤㻡
㻟㻣㻜
㻠㻟㻜
㻡㻡㻜
㻢㻢㻜
㻣㻤㻜
㻥㻡㻜
㻠㻝㻜
㻠㻤㻜
㻢㻝㻜
㻣㻟㻜
㻤㻢㻜
㻝㻜㻡㻜
㻝㻝㻝㻜
㻝㻟㻡㻜
㻡㻜㻜
㻡㻣㻜
㻣㻞㻜
㻤㻢㻜
㻝㻜㻝㻜
㻝㻞㻞㻜
㻝㻞㻥㻜
㻝㻡㻤㻜
㻢㻣㻜
㻤㻟㻜
㻥㻥㻜
㻝㻝㻡㻜
㻝㻟㻥㻜
㻝㻠㻢㻜
㻝㻣㻤㻜
㻞㻝㻡㻜
㻞㻡㻡㻜
㻞㻟㻥㻜
㻞㻤㻜㻜
㻞㻝㻝㻜
㻟㻝㻢㻜
㻟㻡㻡㻜
㻠㻜㻣㻜
㻭㻯㻌㻔㻡㻜㻛㻢㻜㻌㻴㼦㻕
㻝㻤㻜
㻞㻞㻡
㻞㻣㻡
㻟㻞㻜
㻟㻞㻡
㻟㻣㻡
㻠㻤㻜
㻟㻢㻡
㻠㻞㻡
㻡㻠㻜
㻢㻡㻜
㻤㻢㻜
㻥㻟㻜
㻠㻝㻜
㻠㻣㻜
㻢㻜㻜
㻣㻞㻜
㻤㻠㻜
㻝㻜㻝㻜
㻝㻜㻣㻜
㻝㻞㻤㻜
㻠㻥㻜
㻡㻢㻜
㻣㻜㻜
㻤㻠㻜
㻥㻣㻜
㻝㻝㻢㻜
㻝㻞㻞㻜
㻝㻠㻣㻜
㻢㻡㻜
㻤㻜㻜
㻥㻡㻜
㻝㻜㻥㻜
㻝㻞㻥㻜
㻝㻟㻢㻜
㻝㻢㻞㻜
㻝㻥㻟㻜
㻞㻞㻢㻜
㻞㻝㻜㻜
㻞㻠㻟㻜
㻝㻥㻞㻜
㻞㻢㻢㻜
㻞㻥㻢㻜
㻟㻟㻡㻜
㻞㻌㼜㼍㼞㼍㼘㼘㼑㼘
㻟㻌㼜㼍㼞㼍㼘㼘㼑㼘
㻰㻯
㻭㻯㻌㻔㻡㻜㻛㻢㻜㻌㻴㼦㻕
㻰㻯
㻭㻯㻌㻔㻡㻜㻛㻢㻜㻌㻴㼦㻕
㻙
㻙
㻙
㻙
㻙
㻙
㻙
㻙
㻙
㻙
㻙
㻙
㻝㻥㻞㻜
㻝㻣㻥㻜
㻙
㻙
㻙
㻙
㻟㻢㻣㻜
㻟㻜㻢㻜
㻙
㻙
㻠㻞㻟㻜
㻟㻟㻟㻜
㻙
㻙
㻠㻣㻡㻜
㻡㻡㻣㻜
㻢㻠㻝㻜
㻢㻝㻠㻜
㻣㻜㻜㻜
㻙
㻣㻥㻜㻜
㻤㻢㻢㻜
㻥㻢㻤㻜
㻟㻠㻥㻜
㻟㻥㻢㻜
㻠㻠㻡㻜
㻠㻝㻞㻜
㻠㻡㻥㻜
㻙
㻠㻣㻥㻜
㻡㻞㻜㻜
㻡㻣㻜㻜
㻞㻜㻥㻜
㻞㻝㻥㻜
㻞㻢㻞㻜
㻝㻥㻝㻜
㻞㻜㻜㻜
㻞㻟㻟㻜
㻙
㻙
㻞㻟㻥㻜
㻞㻡㻝㻜
㻞㻥㻥㻜
㻝㻠㻡㻜
㻝㻣㻟㻜
㻞㻜㻝㻜
㻞㻞㻤㻜
㻞㻢㻤㻜
㻞㻤㻝㻜
㻟㻟㻝㻜
㻟㻥㻟㻜
㻠㻡㻡㻜
㻠㻞㻥㻜
㻠㻥㻟㻜
㻙
㻡㻡㻝㻜
㻢㻜㻤㻜
㻢㻤㻡㻜
㻞㻝㻞㻜
㻞㻞㻝㻜
㻞㻡㻢㻜
㻝㻟㻥㻜
㻝㻢㻜㻜
㻝㻤㻝㻜
㻞㻜㻝㻜
㻞㻞㻥㻜
㻞㻟㻤㻜
㻞㻣㻟㻜
㻟㻝㻢㻜
㻟㻡㻥㻜
㻟㻟㻜㻜
㻟㻣㻜㻜
㻙
㻟㻤㻣㻜
㻠㻞㻠㻜
㻠㻢㻤㻜
*1 The selection conditions applied to this table are ambient temperature: 40°C and temperature rise: 30K.
*2 The layout of bus bars is a vertical layout.
3-31
3.3.8
Peripheral devices
(1) RHC132S to 315S-4DE Filter stack application table
MD (CT) mode
RHC-D type
RHF-D (*1)
Type
Qty
RHC132S-4DE
RHF160S-4DE
1
RHC160S-4DE
RHF160S-4DE
RHC200S-4DE
Rated current
of MCCB
and ELCB(A)
Magnetic
contactor (52)
Fuse (Fac)
Microswitch
Type
Qty.
Type
Qty.
300
SC-N8
1
170M5446
3
1
350
SC-N11
1
170M6546
3
RHF220S-4DE
1
500
SC-N12
1
170M6547
3
RHC220S-4DE
RHF220S-4DE
1
500
SC-N12
1
170M6547
3
RHC280S-4DE
RHF280S-4DE
1
600
SC-N14
1
170M6499
3
RHC315S-4DE
RHF355S-4DE
1
700
SC-N14
1
170M6500
3
Type
Qty.
170H3027
3
LD (VT) mode
RHC-D type
RHF-D (*1)
Type
Qty.
RHC132S-4DE
RHF160S-4DE
1
RHC160S-4DE
RHF220S-4DE
RHC200S-4DE
Rated current
of MCCB
and ELCB(A)
Magnetic
contactor (52)
Fuse (Fac)
Microswitch
Type
Qty.
Type
Qty.
350
SC-N11
1
170M5446
3
1
500
SC-N12
1
170M6546
3
RHF220S-4DE
1
500
SC-N12
1
170M6547
3
RHC280S-4DE
RHF355S-4DE
1
700
SC-N14
1
170M6499
3
RHC315S-4DE
RHF355S-4DE
1
800
SC-N14
1
170M6500
3
Type
Qty.
170H3027
3
(*1) Contact Fuji Electric if using a peripheral device (73, Fac, Lr, Rf, Lf, Cf) other than a filter stack.
(2) MCCB/ELCB applicable table
Converter stack type
MD (CT)
specifications
LD (VT)
specifications
RHC132S-4DE
Rated current of
MCCB and ELCB(A)
300
RHC160S-4DE
RHC132S-4DE
350
RHC200S-4DE
RHC160S-4DE
500
RHC220S-4DE
RHC200S-4DE
500
RHC280S-4DE
-
600
RHC315S-4DE
RHC280S-4DE
700
-
RHC315S-4DE
800
RHC630B-4DE
1400
RHC710B-4DE
RHC630B-4DE
1600
RHC800B-4DE
RHC710B-4DE
1800
-
RHC800B-4DE
2200
The above table lists the rated current of MCCBs and RCD/ELCBs to be used in the power control
panel with an internal temperature of lower than 50qC. The rated current is factored by a correction
coefficient of 0.90 (800AF or below) or 0.85 (1000AF or above) as the RCDs'/MCCBs' and ELCBs'
original rated current is specified when using them in a surrounding temperature of 40qC or lower.
Select an MCCB and/or RCD/ELCB suitable for the actual short-circuit breaking capacity needed for
your power systems.
3-32
(3) RHC630B to 800B-4DE List of peripheral devices
MD (CT) mode
RHC-D type
RHC630B-4DE
RHC710B-4DE
RHC800B-4DE
RHC-D type
RHC630B-4DE
RHC710B-4DE
RHC800B-4DE
RHC-D type
RHC630B-4DE
RHC710B-4DE
RHC800B-4DE
Charging circuit
contactor
(73)
Qty.
SC-N3
1
SC-N4
1
Power supply
contactor
(52)
Qty.
SC-N12
3
SC-N14
3
Boosting reactor
(Lr)
Qty.
Filtering resistor
(Rf)
Qty.
LR4-630C
LR4-710C
LR4-800C
RF4-630C
RF4-710C
RF4-800C
1
1
1
1
1
1
Charger resistor
(R0)
GRZG400 1:
2 parallel
AC fuse
Qty.
6
Filtering reactor
(Lf)
Qty.
LFC4-630C
LFC4-710C
LFC4-800C
1
1
1
(Fac)
Qty.
SA598473
2
HF5G2655
2
Filtering capacitor
(Cf)
Qty.
CF4-630C
CF4-710C
CF4-800C
1
1
1
Filter circuit contactor
(6F)
Qty.
SC-N7/SF
1
SC-N11/SF
1
LD (VT) mode
RHC-D type
Charging circuit
contactor
(73)
Qty.
RHC630B-4DE
RHC710B-4DE
SC-N12
SC-N14
SC-N4
RHC630B-4DE
RHC710B-4DE
RHC800B-4DE
RHC-D type
RHC630B-4DE
RHC710B-4DE
RHC800B-4DE
3
3
1
RHC800B-4DE
RHC-D type
Power supply
contactor
(52)
Qty.
SC-N16
3
Boosting reactor
(Lr)
Qty.
Filtering resistor
(Rf)
Qty.
LR4-710C
LR4-800C
LR4-1000C
RF4-710C
RF4-800C
RF4-1000C
1
1
1
Filter circuit contactor
(6F)
Qty.
SC-N11/SF
1
3-33
1
1
1
Charger resistor
(R0)
GRZG400 1:
2 parallel
Qty.
6
Filtering reactor
(Lf)
Qty.
LFC4-710C
LFC4-800C
LFC4-1000C
1
1
1
AC fuse
(Fac)
Qty.
HF5G2655
2
Contact your
Fuji Electric
representative
separately.
Filtering capacitor
(Cf)
Qty.
CF4-710C
CF4-800C
CF4-1000C
1
1
1
3.3.9
Connecting optional devices
If the power supply capacity is small, voltage distortion is not completely suppressed and electromagnetic noise
may generate from the power supply transformer or other devices even if filters are installed.
Noise immunity of peripheral devices and wiring method of the main circuit give large effects on noise, so that the
following devices may not be enough to suppress noise.
Use shielded cables, metallic piping and other measures for the wiring up to the motor.
(1) Noise suppression option
The following pieces of optional equipment are prepared.
Choose them when necessary.
Name (Model)
Function
Ferrite ring for suppression of
radio noise
(ACL-……B)
Applicable for suppression of radio noise.
Power filter
Use to suppress noise generating from inverter.
Capacitor for harmonic filter
to reduce radio noise
Be sure to install it as shown in below Figure, id not might cause “DC fuse blown” by
mistake.
Use to decrease radio noise.
The effect of the noise decrease is achieved for the frequency band of 1 MHz or less
that is the AM Radio Frequency belt.
For models and dimensioned drawings of the zero phase sequence reactor and the capacitor for harmonic filter, refer
to catalog "Fuji's Inverter FRENIC Series Options" (MH596…) and user’s manual "FRENIC-VG series For the
STACK type"(24A7-…-0018…).
R0
FAB
Converter
Ferrite
Power filter
ring
52
Lf
Lr
F
L1/R
Inverter
P(+)
P(+)
N(-)
N(-)
73
Capacitor
for
harmonic
filter
Filter
T2
R3
T3
Cf
R1
S1
T1
R0
T0
R0 T0
Figure 3.3-24
Connecting Optional Devices
3-34
W
G
R2
Rf
U
V
L2/S
L3/T
Ferrite
ring
R0
R0
T0
T0
M
4 Preparation for Operation
4.1 Inspection and Preparation
4.3 Test Run
Before start, check the following.
(1) Connection
• Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the
power ON (closed circuit). Do not remove the
cover when the power is ON.
• Do not operate switches with wet hands.
Electric shock may result.
• Check that the power cables are not connected to
converter output terminals P (+) or N (-).
• Check that wiring to R1, S1 and T1 are made.
• Check that wiring to 73A and 73C are made in
compliance with the basic connection diagram.
• Check that the boosting reactor and filter are
connected in compliance with the basic connection
diagram.
• Check that the grounding terminal is securely
grounded.
• When the filter stack applies, check that main
power inputs L1, L2 and L3 and main power
outputs U0, V0 and W0 are not reversely
connected.
• When the filter stack applies, contactor control
inputs 73-1 and 73-2 for the charging circuit are
connected in compliance with the basic connection
diagram.
After checking that these is no problem in Section 4.1,
arrange wiring for actual operation and perform a test
run (with short-circuited between RUN and CM of the
converter).
For the test run procedure of the inverter, refer to the
inverter instruction manual.
(1) Turn the power ON and check that the bar graph
shows the correct input voltage and power supply
frequency.
(2) Check that the RUN LED on the keypad is lit.
(3) Select LED Monitor 4 (DC LINK VOLTAGE) and
check that the displayed value is within the
following range. The DC link bus voltage should
be automatically adjusted within the following
range.
(2) Check that there is no short-circuit or grounding
fault across terminals or naked charged parts.
(3) Check that terminals, connectors and screws are
not loosened.
Voltage range: 640 to 710 V
(4) Before turning the power ON, check that the
switches are turned OFF so that turning the power
ON does not cause the inverter to start or
malfunction. Remove the short bar (if any)
between RUN and CM of the converter.
(4) Perform a test run of the inverter.
(5) After turning the power ON, check that:
Notes
• In the event of a fault in the converter, inverter or
motor, immediately stop it. Investigate the cause of
the fault, referring to Section 7.3 "Troubleshooting"
or the inverter instruction manual.
After checking for correct operation in the above test
run, start regular operation.
a) The charge lamp lights up.
b) The LCD monitor on the keypad displays data
specified with function code F04 (LED monitor).
(By factory default, the input power displays.)
(Check if an alarm is displayed.)
• If the circuit breaker is turned ON (closed circuit) to
supply power, voltage is output across DC output
terminals P(+) and N(-) even if no run command is
entered to the converter (even without connection
across control terminals RUN and CM).
c) The fans incorporated in the converter and filter
stack rotate.
• To touch the electric circuit even after the power is
shut down, make sure that the charge lamp is OFF or
the voltage on the circuit has dropped to the safe level
using a multimeter. This is because even if the power
is shut down, the smoothing capacitors remain
charged and require time to be discharged.
4.2 Driving Method
• Keep away from the heat sink because it becomes
very hot.
Burns may result.
There are various driving methods. Choose the most
suitable one, referring to the basic connection diagram.
4-1
5 Operation Using the Keypad
5.1 Appearance
c LED monitor
- Four-digit, 7-segment LED monitor
- Displays various monitor data as well as alarm codes. (By
factory default, the input power (%) is displayed.)
d Indicators
- The unit of the monitored data on the LED monitor is
indicated with a bar "
" shown at the upper part of the
LCD below the applicable unit.
㻌 䠤䡖㻌 㻌 㻭㻌 㻌 㼂㻌 㻌 䠂㻌 㻌 㻌 㻌 㻌 㻌 㻌 㻌 㻌 㼗㼃㻌 㻌 㻌 㻌
‫ۂ‬
‫ۂ‬
‫ۂ‬
‫ۂ‬
‫ۂ‬
㻌
㸲㸯㸶
㸳㸵 㸲㸲㸮
㸴㸮 ‫ڸ‬
‫ڸ‬
㹔
㸲㸴㸰
㹆㹸
㸴㸱
If there is an upper order page to the screen shown on the
LCD, an UP arrow "Ÿ" appears at the upper right of the
LCD monitor; if there is a lower order page, a DOWN
arrow "ź" appears at the lower right of the LCD monitor.
㻾㼁㻺㻌 㻌 㻌 㻿㼀㻻㻼㻌 㻌 㻌 㻌 㻌 㻌
O LCD monitor
- Max. 13 characters by 5 lines
䌻
㻼㻾㻳㻌
RUN
㻿㻴㻵㻲㼀㻌
㻪㻪㻌
䌼㻌
㻾㻱㻿㻱㼀㻌
㻲㼁㻺㻯㻌
㻰㻭㼀㻭㻌
㻿㼀㻻㻼㻌
- Displays various data such as the running status, function
code and data. Because an operation guide scrolls in the
lower line of the LCD, the user can operate easily while
referring to the guide, even if he/she is not familiar with
the operation method of the keypad. (A bar graph is
displayed by factory default.)
f RUN LED
- Lit upon short circuit across RUN and CM at the terminal
block, or upon activation of the RUN bit in the link.
- Unlit upon open circuit across RUN and CM, or upon
deactivation of the RUN bit in the link.
g Operation keys
- Used to switch screens or change data.
Table 5.1-1 lists major functions of the operation keys.
Table 5.1-1
Operation keys
Used to:
Go to the menu screen or go to the initial screen of the Running or Alarm mode.
㻼㻾㻳
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
䌻
Functions of Operation Keys
Switch the LED monitor or settle the function code data.
䠈
Change data, move the cursor up or down (for selection), or scroll the screen.
䌼
Move the cursor among digits during data change or jump to the next function code
block (when pressed together with the UP/DOWN key).
㻿㻴㻵㻲㼀
䍿
Cancel data halfway through modification and move the display screen. When there is
an alarm, the key functions as an alarm reset key only on the initial screen of the
Alarm mode.
㻾㻱㻿㻱㼀
㻿㼀㻻㻼 㻗
䌻
䠈
䌼
Change the F00 setting (Data protection).
5-1
5.2 Operation and Display Screen
5.2.1
Screen immediately after auxiliary control power supply is turned on
㸶㸶㸶㸶
5($'<
If the power is turned ON only with the control power
auxiliary input terminals (R0 and T0) without turning
the main circuit power supply ON, the 7-segment LED
monitor shows "8888" and the LCD monitor shows
"READY." This means that the main circuit is not
charged so that the converter waits for the main power
to turn ON.
㸶㸶㸶㸶
35*
э'$7$6(77,1*
'$7$&+(&.
2350175
,2&+(&.
5(6(7
Initial screen
To change function codes, press the PRG key to switch
to the Programming menu.
Menu screen
5-2
5.2.2
Screen immediately after the main circuit power supply is turned on
(1) For one or two seconds immediately after the main
circuit power is turned ON, the initial screen
shown at the left is displayed on the LCD monitor.
The 7-segment LED monitor changes in the order
of "8888o3333o2222o1111" and switches to the
operation screen shown at (2) when the converter
is ready to run.
(1) Initial Screen
㸶㸶㸶㸶Ѝ㸮㸮㸮㸮
㸮㸮㸮㸮
PWM
CONVERTER
RHC C-TYPE
5($'<ĺ&203/(7(
(2) The operation screen has two types: the screen
where the converter running status and operation
guidance are displayed, and the screen where the
running status is displayed graphically with bar
graphs.
To switch between those screens, use function code
F05 "LCD Monitor" (keypad indication "LCD
MNTR").
(The factory default is bar graph screen 2.)
(2) Operation Screen
F05=0 (GUIDANC)
No run command
With run command
(waiting for voltage boost)
㸮
㸮
STOP
RUN
PRGэPRG MENU
F/DэLED SHIFT
PRGэPRG MENU
F/DэLED SHIFT
During running
(during power running)
During running
(during regeneration)
㸯㸮㸮
Switching operation (Operation procedure from the
operation screen)
a. Press the PRG key to go to the program menu screen.
b. In the program menu, use ȁ and V keys to move the
cursor to "1: DATA SET." Press the FUNC/DATA
key to go to the function code directory selection
screen.
c. In the function code directory selection screen, use
the ȁ and V keys to move the cursor to "F CODE."
Press the FUNC/DATA or >> key to go to the
function code selection screen.
d. In the function code selection screen, use the ȁ and
V keys to move the cursor to F05 "LCD MNTR."
Press the FUNC/DATA key to go to the function
code setting screen.
e. In the function code setting screen, use the ȁ and V
keys to select the desired screen and press the
FUNC/DATA key to determine it. After determining,
you will return to the function code selection screen.
f. In the function code selection screen, press the PRG
key to go to the operation screen. Or, press the
RESET key three times to go to the directory
structure screen, to the menu screen and to the
operation screen.
㸯㸮㸮
DRV
REG
PRGэPRG MENU
F/DэLED SHIFT
PRGэPRG MENU
F/DэLED SHIFT
"100%" indicates the incoming power.
F05=1 (GRAPH 1)
Bar graph screen 1
㸮
%
200
%
200
ĸInput power
PWR 100
Iin 100
ĸEffective input current
Input power
Full scale: 200% of rated capacity of converter
Effective input current
Full scale: 200% of rated current of converter
F05=2 (GRAPH 2) (* Factory default)
Bar graph screen 2
㸮
V
418 440 462
Hz
57 60
63
ĸInput voltage fluctuation
ĸInput frequency fluctuation
The real time input voltage is displayed with a black bar
indicator „ (min., average and max. values).
The real time input frequency is displayed with a black bar
indicator „ (min., average and max. values).
5-3
5.2.3
Switching LED monitor screens
Press the FUNC/DATA key when the operation screen is displayed, to switch the data displayed on the LED monitor.
Each time the FUNC/DATA key is pressed, the data displayed on the LED monitor changes.
The data displayed on the LED monitor immediately after the power is turned on follows the setting of function code
F04 "LED Monitor (Display Selection)."
Table 5.2-1
F04
0
LED monitor
Input power 1
unit
%
1
Input power 2
kW
2
Effective input
current
A
3
4
5
Effective input
voltage
DC link voltage
Power supply
frequency
FUNC/DATA
FUNC/DATA + ҍ
Monitor Display
Resolution
1
0.1 to 999.9: 0.1
1000 to
:1
0.01 to 99.99 : 0.01
100.0 to 999.9 : 0.1
1000 to
:1
V
1
V
1
Hz
0.1
5-4
Forward scroll
FUNC/DATA + Ҏ
Reverse scroll
5.2.4
Switching LCD screens
The types of LCD screens of the keypad are as follows.
You can operate easily according to the following program menu displayed on the screen.
Program menu
Function
c DATA SET
You can check data or select a function code to be changed.
d DATA CHECK
A data list is displayed.
O OPR MNTR
You can monitor the current operation status of the converter.
f I/O CHECK
The state of the converter and I/O terminals is displayed.
g MAINTENANC
Data concerning startup of the converter or that concerning trouble occurrence or
maintenance and inspection are displayed.
h LOAD FCTR
The load factor is measured.
i ALM INF
The operation data immediately before occurrence of the latest alarm is displayed.
j ALM CAUSE
A history of 10 past alarms and data about multiple alarms currently occurring are
displayed.
k DATA COPY
A set of function codes of the converter can be saved and copied to multiple converters.
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
䠌
䐟
䚷䠫䠤䠍
㻿㼍㼢㼑
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻌㻔㻯㼛㼐㼑㻌㻗㻌
㻰㻭㼀㻭
㻝㻕
㻲㼡㼚㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼙㼑㼚㼡
䌻㻘䌼㻦㻌㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㼟㻌㼍㻌㼏㼛㼐㼑
䍿㻦㻌㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㼟㻌㼍㻌㼐㼕㼞㼑㼏㼠㼛㼞㼥
䍿㻗䌻㻛䌼㻦㻌㻳㼞㼛㼡㼜㻌㼖㼡㼙㼜
㻾㻱㻿㻱㼀
䠌
䚷䠫䠤䠍
㻿㻱㼀㻌㻰㻭㼀㻭
䍿㻗㻼㻾㻳
䍿㻗㻼㻾㻳
䠌
䐠
䌻㻘䌼㻦㻌㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㼟㻌㼍㻌㼢㼍㼘㼡㼑
㻿㼀㻻㻼㻗䌻㻛䌼㻦㻌㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㼟㻌㼍㻌
㼟㼜㼑㼏㼕㼍㼘㻌㼢㼍㼘㼡㼑
䍿㻦㻌㻹㼛㼢㼑㼟㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞
䚷䠫䠤䠍
㻯㻴㻱㻯㻷㻌㻰㻭㼀㻭
䌻㻘䌼㻦㻌㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㼟㻌㼍㻌㼏㼛㼐㼑
㻲㼁㻺㻯 㻦㻿㼍㼢㼑
㻰㻭㼀㻭 㻌㻔㻯㼛㼐㼑㻌㻗㻌
㻝㻕
䍿㻦㻌㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㼟㻌㼍㻌㼐㼕㼞㼑㼏㼠㼛㼞㼥
䠌
䍿㻗䌻㻛䌼㻦㻌㻳㼞㼛㼡㼜㻌㼖㼡㼙㼜
㻝㻕㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼟
䐡
㻞㻕㻌㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
㻝㻕㻌㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼑㻌㻝
㻟㻕㻌㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼠㼑㼞㼙㼕㼚㼍㼘㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
㻞㻕㻌㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼑㻌㻞
㻼㻾㻳
䐢
䌻 䌼
䌻 䌼
㻞㻕㻌㻮㼍㼞㻌㼓㼞㼍㼜㼔㻌㻝
㻲㼡㼚㼏㻙
㻟㻕㻌㻮㼍㼞㻌㼓㼞㼍㼜㼔㻌㻞
㼠㼕㼛㼚
䚷䠫䠤䠍
㻵㻛㻻㻌㻯㻴㻱㻯㻷
䚷䠫䠤䠍
㻹㻻㻺㻵㼀㻻㻾
㻝㻕㻌㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼓㼡㼕㼐㼑
䠌
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑
䠌
㻾㻱㻿㻱㼀
㻠㻕㻌㻭㻵㻻㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
㻟㻕㻌㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼑㻌㻟
㻡㻕㻌㻰㻵㻻㻭㻌㼕㼚㼜㼡㼠㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
䠌
㻼㻾㻳
䐣
䠌
䚷䠫䠤䠍
䌻 䌼
㻹㻭㻵㻺㼀㻱㻺㻭㻺㻯㻱㻌㻵㻺㻲㻻
䠌
䚷䠫䠤䠍
㻼㼞㼛㼓㼞㼍㼙㻌㼙㼑㼚㼡
䌻㻘䌼㻦㻌㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㼟㻌㼍㻌
㼒㼡㼚㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼎㼑㼠㼣㼑㼑㼚㻌㻔㻝㻕㻌
㼍㼚㼐㻌㻔㻥㻕
䚷䠫䠤䠍
㻭㻸㻭㻾㻹㻌㻵㻺㻲㻻
㻝㻕㻌㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻌㻝
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
䌻 䌼
㻞㻕㻌㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻌㻞
㻾㻱㻿㻱㼀
㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌
㼙㼛㼐㼑㻌㼛㼚㼘㼥
㻝㻕㻌㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
㻟㻕㻌㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻌㻟
㻞㻕㻌㻭㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
㻠㻕㻌㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
㻡㻕㻌㻾㻻㻹㻌㼢㼑㼞㼟㼕㼛㼚㻌㻝
㻟㻕㻌㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
㻢㻕㻌㻾㻻㻹㻌㼢㼑㼞㼟㼕㼛㼚㻌㻞
䠌
䐤
䐥
㻠㻕㻌㻵㻛㻻㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼟
㻡㻕㻌㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
䚷䠫䠤䠍
㻢㻕㻌㻰㻵㻻㻭㻌㼕㼚㼜㼡㼠㻌㼟㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟
㻸㼛㼍㼐㻌㼒㼍㼏㼠㼛㼞㻌
㼙㼑㼍㼟㼡㼞㼑㼙㼑㼚㼠
㻲㻛㻰㻦㻌㻿㼠㼍㼞㼠㼟㻛㼟㼠㼛㼜㼟㻌
㼙㼑㼍㼟㼡㼞㼑㼙㼑㼚㼠
㻣㻕㻌㻭㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼔㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㼥㻌㻝
㻤㻕㻌㻹㼡㼘㼠㼕㼜㼘㼑㻌㼍㼘㼍㼞㼙㼟
㻥㻕㻌㻭㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼔㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㼥㻌㻞
㻝㻜㻕㻌㻭㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼔㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㼥㻌㻟
䠌
䠟䠫䠬䠵
㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㼏㼛㼜㼥
䌻㻘䌼㻦㻌㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㼟㻌㼍㻌
㼜㼞㼛㼏㼑㼟㼟
㻲㻛㻰㻦㻌㻿㼠㼍㼞㼠㼟㻌㼏㼛㼜㼥㼕㼚㼓
䠌
䚷䠫䠤䠍
䠌
㻭㼘㼍㼞㼙㻌㼔㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㼥
䐧
䐦
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
䌻㻘䌼㻦㻌㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㼟㻌㼍㼚㻌㼍㼘㼍㼞㼙
㻾㻱㻿㻱㼀
5-5
䚷䠫䠤䠍
㻯㻭㼁㻿㻱
䌻㻘䌼㻦㻌㻿㼏㼞㼛㼘㼘㼟㻌㼛㼢㼑㼞㻌
㼟㼏㼞㼑㼑㼚
5.2.5
Configuring function code data
(1) Transition of Data Setting Screen
Operation screen
㸮
V
418 440 462
Hz
57 60
63
PRG
㸮
Menu screen
Press the PRG key on the operation screen to go to the menu screen.
Using the ȁ and V keys, move the arrow at the left end in the menu
screen to select "1. DATA SET" and press the FUNC/DATA key to
display the function code parent directory screen. Using the ȁ and V
keys, select the parent directory of the desired function code and use the
FUNC/DATA key or >> key to go to the function code selection screen.
On the function code selection screen, use the ȁ and V keys to change the
desired function code.
On the function code setting screen, use the ȁ and V keys to enter a value,
and press the FUNC/DATA key to determine it.
э1. DATA SET
2. DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
F/D
Parent directory screen
F CODE
E CODE
H CODE
U CODE
F/D or ӑ
RESET
Function code selection screen
F00 DATA PRTC
F01 HARM FILTR
F02 RESTART
F03 IR SELECT
F/D
Function code setting
screen
F00 DATA PRTC
0:CHG OK
0㹼1
RESET
Ҏ
F CODE
E CODE
H CODE
U CODE
F00 DATA PRTC
F01 HARM FILTR
F02 RESTART
F03 IR SELECT
Ҏ
F CODE
E CODE
H CODE
U CODE
F/D
Ҏ
Ҏ ™㹬
F06 LANGUAGE
F07 CONTRAST
F08 CAREER FRQ
E01 X1 FUNC
5-6
F01 HARM FILTR
F02 RESTART
F03 IR SELECT
F04 LED MNTR
(2) Data Setting Method
Press and hold the ȁ and V key or select the desired digit with the cursor and change it directly to change data.
Example of data
change 1
H09 485 ANS
0.01s
H09 485 ANS
0.01s
Example of data
change 2
H09 485 ANS
0.01s
ӑ
ҍ
H09 485 ANS
0.01s
0.02s
H09 485 ANS
0.01s
ӑ
H09 485 ANS
0.01s
ӑ
ҍ
ӑ
H09 485 ANS
0.01s
H09 485 ANS
0.01s
0.03s
ҍ
H09 485 ANS
0.01s
1.00s
Press and hold
ҍ five seconds.
H09 485 ANS
0.01s
0.50s
H09 485 ANS
0.01s
0.60s
The active digit moves to the left and
the digits in the lower order become
"0."
ҍ ReleasHȁNH\
H09 485 ANS
0.01s
0.60s
ҍ
H09 485 ANS
0.01s
0.70s
Select the function code and press the FUNC/DATA key to go to the data setting screen.
On the data setting screen, press ȁ and V keys to increase or decrease the least significant digit displayed on the
LCD. Press and hold the ȁ and V keys to move the active digit to the left to change at a higher speed. Or press the
>> key to select the desired digit and change the data directly. After data is changed, the previous data is
simultaneously displayed. Use the old data as a reference. After the desired data is displayed, press the FUNC/DATA
key to save the new data. Or press the RESET key to cancel data change and return to the function code selection
screen.
5-7
The new data of the function code is not reflected on converter operation until the FUNC/DATA key is pressed to
save it; there is no change in the action while the data is changed with ȁ and V keys. The data may not be changed if
the data is protected or data change is prohibited during operation. The reason why the data is not changed includes
the following.
Display
Cause of prohibition of change
Resetting method
DATA PRTCTD
Data is protected with function code F00.
Change function code F00 to "0."
CNV RUNNING
A function code that cannot be changed during operation
of the converter is being changed.
Stop converter operation.
Example of data
change 3
F04 LED MNTR
Example of data
change 4
E14 I/O OP/CL
OP
CL
0:PWR %
0㹼5
• Example of data change 4 is for I/O
function setting (normally
open/closed).
The function code cannot be
changed during operation.
RUN X1 Y1 2 3 5 30
ӑ
ҍ
F04 LED MNTR
0:PWR %
1:PWR kW
0㹼5
E14 I/O OP/CL
OP
CL
RUN X1 Y1 2 3 5 30
ӑ The blinking cursor moves
among active options only.
ҍ
F04 LED MNTR
0:PWR %
2:INPUT I
0㹼5
ҍ ™Q
F04 LED MNTR
0:PWR %
5:FREQ
0㹼5
E14 I/O OP/CL
OP
CL
RUN X1 Y1 2 3 5 30
Ҏ
ҍ ȁ or V key: movement in one
direction only
E14 I/O OP/CL
OP
CL
RUN X1 Y1 2 3 5 30
Ҏ
F04 LED MNTR
0:PWR %
4:DC LNKV
0㹼5
ӑ ™㸱
E14 I/O OP/CL
OP
CL
RUN X1 Y1 2 3 5 30
ӑ ™㸰
E14 I/O OP/CL
OP
CL
RUN X1 Y1 2 3 5 30
Press the F/D key to
F/D validate data entry.
E15 RHC-OL-WAR
E16 FAN STOP
E17 I-LIM HYS
E18 AO1 FUNC
5-8
5.2.6
Checking function code settings
Operation screen
Menu screen
㸮
V
418 440 462
Hz
57 60
63
㸮
PRG
1. DATA SET
э 2. DATA CHECK
3. OPT MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
㸮
F
CODE
Press the PRG key on the operation screen to go to the
menu screen. Using ȁ and V keys, move the arrow at the
left end in the menu screen to select "2. DATA CHECK"
and press the FUNC/DATA key to display the function
code and the setting on the LCD.
After the function code and data are displayed on the
screen, press ȁ and V keys to select the desired function
code to be checked. The method for selecting the
function code is similar to Section 5.2.5 "Function Code
Setting."
Select a function code, change the data and press the
FUNC/DATA key to change data as if the operation is
made on the function code setting screen.
E CODE
H
CODE
U
CODE
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
Function code
selection screen
Function code
setting screen
㸮
F00 DATA PRTC
0: CHG OK
0㹼1
㸮
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
F00 0: CHG OK
F01 0: CONNECT
F02*1: ACTIVE
F03 0: CT
5-9
5.2.7
Monitoring the running status
Running screen
㸮
Press the PRG key on the running screen to go to the menu screen.
Using ȁ and V keys, move the arrow at the left end in the menu
screen to select "3. OPR MNTR" and press the FUNC/DATA key
to display the current state of the converter on the LCD.
V
418 440 462
Hz
57 60
63
㻼㻾㻳
Menu screen
The running status monitor includes three screens. Use ȁ and V
keys to switch between screens and check the operation state.
㸮
1. DATA SET
2. DATA CHECK
э 3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
Running status monitor
screen 1
㸮
PWR = xxx.x kW
Iin = xxxx.x A
Vin = xxx V
f
= xxx.x Hz
Input power (in kW)
Effective input current (in A)
Effective input voltage (in V)
Power supply frequency (in Hz)
䌼
Running status monitor
screen 2
(Power supply frequency
fluctuation)
㸮
f
= xx.xHz
fmax = xx.xHz
fmin = xx.xHz
3ı = xx.xHz
䌼
㸮
V
= xxx V
Vmax = xxx V
Vmin = xxx V
Running status monitor
screen 3
(Input voltage fluctuation)
Average power supply frequency
Max. power supply frequency
(Maximum sampling value is displayed)
Min. power supply frequency
(Minimum sampling value is displayed.)
Standard deviation of power supply frequency x 3 times (3 V)
(3 V of normal distribution of sampled data)
o The quality of the power supply can be judged from the value
of 3 V. (Maximum value in each hour)
Note: The displayed maximum value may be a little larger than
the actual value due to calculation error during power-on.
Average input voltage
Max. input voltage
(Maximum sampling value is displayed.)
Min. input voltage
(Minimum sampling value is displayed.)
Note: The displayed maximum value may be a little larger than
the actual value due to calculation error during power-on.
5-10
5.2.8
Checking I/O signal states
Press the PRG key on the operation screen to switch to the menu screen. Using ȁ and V keys at the left end in the
menu screen, select "4. I/O CHECK" and press the FUNC/DATA key to display the state of the converter and
optional equipment on the LCD.
Some screens are skipped if the optional equipment is not installed. The I/O check screen includes five screens. Use
ȁ and V keys to switch between screens and check data.
㸮
Operation
screen
V
418 440 462
Hz
57 60
63
㸮
‫ڦ‬581‫<ڦ<ڦ‬$
‫ڧ‬567‫<ڦ‬
‫<ڧ ;ڧ‬
$2 s[[[9
㻼㻾㻳
I/O signal (terminal)
†: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
Analog output signal (A01)
䌼
㸮
1. DATA SET
2. DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
э 4. I/O CHECK
I/O signal screen
㸮
‫ڦ‬581‫ڦ‬189
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
‫ڧ‬,17‫ڧ‬$/0
‫'ڧ‬59
‫ڧ‬5(*
䌼
Operation state screen
Operation state
†: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
RUN: Running, INT: Converter shutoff (Inversion of
logic during operation)
DRV: During power running, REG: During regeneration
NUV: DC link establishment, ALM: Batch failure
Menu screen
Optional equipment installation data screen
㸮
DIOA :
AIO
:
TLINK :
SI
:
CCL
:
SX
:
FIELD :
TRACE :
OPC-VG7-DIO
OPC-VG7-AIO
OPC-VG7-TL
OPC-VG7-SI (SIR)
OPC-VG7-CCL
OPC-VG7-SX
-OPC-RHC-TR
‫'ڧ‬,2$ ‫ڧ‬$,2
‫ڧ‬7/,1.‫ڧ‬6,
‫&&ڧ‬/ ‫ڧ‬6;
‫)ڧ‬,(/'‫ڧ‬75$&(
Optional equipment data
†: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
Installed optional equipment is displayed.
䌼
㸮
$L
$L
$2
$2
s[[[9
s[[[9
s[[[9
s[[[9
* This screen is displayed if optional OPC-VG7-AIO is
installed.
AIO option I/O data screen
Ai3 and Ai4 are invalid.
AIO output state 1 (Ao4)
AIO output state 2 (Ao5)
䌼
㸮
‫<ڧ<ڧ‬
‫<ڧ<ڧ‬
‫<ڧ<ڧ‬
‫<ڧ<ڧ‬
* This screen is displayed if optional OPC-VG7-DIO is
installed.
DIOA option I/O data screen
DIOA output state
†: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
5-11
5.2.9
Displaying maintenance information
Operation screen
㸮
V
418 440 462
57
60
63
Hz
Press the PRG key on the operation screen to go to the
menu screen. Using ȁ and V keys, move the arrow at the
left end in the menu screen to select "5. MAINTENANC"
and press the FUNC/DATA key to display data to be
checked during startup of the converter or during
maintenance and inspection, on the LCD.
㻼㻾㻳
㸮
Menu screen
1. DATA SET
2. DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
The maintenance data screen includes six screens.
Using ȁ and V keys, switch between screens and check
data.
э 5. MAINTENANC
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
Action state monitor screen 1
㸮
TIME = xxxxx h
EDC = xxx V
TMPI = xxx°C
TMPF = xxx°C
䌼
Cumulative run hours (The cumulative power-up hours are
displayed.)
Detected DC link voltage
Max. temperature inside converter (Maximum temperature
in hour)
Max. temperature of heat sink (Maximum temperature in
hour)
*Cumulative run hours : 1 is 10 run hours
(ex: 1000h is 10000 run hours)
Action state monitor screen 2
㸮
Effective max. input current (Maximum value in hour)
Max. input power (Maximum value in hour)
Imax = xxx.xx A
Pmax = xxxx.x kW
䌼
㸮
Action state monitor screen 3
TCAP = xxxxxh
(61000h)
TFAN = xxxxxh
(25000h)
Cumulative life of Pt board capacitor
Pt board capacitor life judgment level (Fixed)
Cooling fan run hours
Cooling fan life judgment level (Fixed)
䌼
5-12
㸮
Communication state
monitor screen
Communication retry cycles: Keypad
Communication retry cycles, latest error code: RS-485
Communication retry cycles, latest error code: TL (CCL)/SX
Communication retry cycles, latest error code: SI option
NRK = xxxxx
NRR = xxxxx xx
NRO = xxxxx xx
NRL = xxxxx xx
Latest error code
Communication error code displayed according to communication
state in response to inquiry from link
For the details of error codes, refer to Section 12.4 "Data Format
List".
䌼
ROM version
check screen 1
㸮
MAIN = H1xxxx
PWR = H2xxxx
KP = K xxxx
ROM version: Main control CPU (MAIN)
ROM version: Power factor control CPU (PWR)
ROM version: Keypad
"-----" upon error of main control CPU or power factor control CPU
䌼
㸮
OP1 = Q1xxxx
OP2 = Q1xxxx
ROM version
check screen 2
ROM version: 8-bit BUS option CPU (OP1)
ROM version: 8-bit BUS option CPU (OP2)
"-----" if CPU is not installed.
5-13
5.2.10 Measuring load factor
Running screen
Menu screen
㸮
V
418 440 462
Hz
57 60
63
㸮
㻼㻾㻳
1. DATA SET
2. DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
5. MAINTENANC
э 6.LOAD FCTR
Use ȁ, V or >> to change
measuring time.
Measuring condition setting
Press the PRG key on the operation screen to go to the
menu screen. Using ȁ and V keys, move the arrow at
the left end in the menu screen to select "6. LOAD
FCTR" and press the FUNC/DATA key to display the
load factor measurement screen on the LCD.
On the load factor measurement screen, you can enter
the maximum current, average current and average
braking power in the specified time.
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
Load factor measurement screen
㸮
㸮
T
= 600s
Imax = 0.00A
Iave = 0.00A
Pave = 0%
T
= 3600s
Imax = 0.00A
Iave = 0.00A
Pave = 0%
The cursor is located at the measuring time. Use the ȁ
and V key to change the digit at which the cursor blinks.
Use the >> key to change the digit where the cursor is
located.
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
㸮 Measurement start
The displayed measuring
time indicates the
remaining measuring time.
When the measuring time is
reduced to zero,
measurement is finished.
T
= 120s
Imax = 0.00A
Iave = 0.00A
Pave = 0%
㸮
T
= 3600s
Imax = 56.40A
Iave = 23.50A
Pave = 10%
Load factor measuring time
Max. input current
Average input current
Average power consumption
(Rated converter capacity:
100%)
Press the FUNC/DATA key to start to measure the load
factor. The displayed measuring time decreases. When
the time is reduced to "0," measurement is finished.
Press the FUNC/DATA key during measurement to
interrupt measurement and display the value measured
up to the timing.
After measurement is finished, the measuring time
returns to the initial value, and the measured load ratio
values are displayed.
5-14
5.2.11
Displaying alarm information
Operation screen
㸮
Press the PRG key on the operation screen to go to the
menu screen. Using ȁ and V keys, select "7. ALM INF"
and press the FUNC/DATA key to display the operation
data immediately before the latest alarm, on the LCD.
V
418 440 462
Hz
57 60
63
㻼㻾㻳
㸮
Menu screen
1. DATA SET
2. DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
The alarm data screen includes 10 screens. Using ȁ and V
keys, switch between screens to check data.
5. MAINTENANC
6.LOAD FCTR
э 7.ALM INF
㸿㹍
㹍㹁
Use alarm data to display the data having been effective
immediately before the alarm.
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
Screen for checking operation state at alarm
PWR = xxx.x kW
Iin = xx.xx A
Vin = xxx.x V
f
= xxx.x Hz
Input power at alarm
Effective input current at alarm
Effective input voltage at alarm
Power supply frequency at alarm
䌼
Screen for checking action state at alarm
㸿㹍
㹍㹁
TIME = xxxxxh
EDC = xxxV
TMPI = xxxx°C
TMPF = xxxx°C
Cumulative run hours at alarm
Detected link voltage at alarm
Internal temperature of converter at alarm
Heat sink temperature at alarm
䌼
㸿㹍㹁
NRK = xxxxx
NRR = xxxxx
NRO = xxxxx
NRL = xxxxx
Screen for checking communication state at alarm
Communication retry cycles at alarm: Keypad
Communication retry cycles at alarm: RS-485
Communication retry cycles at alarm: TL (CCL)/SX
Communication retry cycles at alarm: SI option
䌼
㸿㹍㹁
‫ڧ‬581‫<ڧ<ڧ‬$
‫ڧ‬567‫<ڧ‬
‫<ڧ ;ڧ‬
Screen for checking I/O signal at alarm
Input signal at alarm (Terminal block/communication)
†: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
5-15
䌼
㸿㹍㹁
Screen for checking operation state at alarm
Operation state at alarm
†: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
‫ڧ‬581 ‫ڧ‬189
‫ڧ‬,17 ‫ڧ‬$/0
‫'ڧ‬59
‫ڧ‬5(*
䌼
㸿㹍㹁
* This screen is displayed if optional OPC-VG7-DIO is installed.
Screen for checking DIOA option output signal at alarm
Output signal at alarm
†: Signal OFF, „: Signal ON
‫<ڧ<ڧ‬
‫<ڧ<ڧ‬
‫<ڧ<ڧ‬
‫<ڧ<ڧ‬
䌼
㸿㹍㹁
0/1=xxx
-1=xxx
-2=xxx
-3=xxx
Alarm history check screen 1
Latest alarm history
Alarm history (-1 to -3)
(Updated each time an alarm occurs. If the new alarm
is the same as an earlier one, the frequency increases
by one.)
Alarm code
Frequency
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
䌼
Multiple alarm check screen
Multiple alarms
(Current alarms are displayed according to the
number of alarms.)
㸿㹍㹁
5=xxx
4=xxx
3=xxx
2=xxx
䌼
㸿㹍㹁
-4=xxx
-5=xxx
-6=xxx
-7=xxx
Alarm history check screen 2
Alarm history (-4 to -7)
(Updated each time an alarm occurs. If the new alarm
is the same as an earlier one, the frequency increases
by one.)
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
䌼
Alarm history check screen 3
Alarm history (-8 to -10)
(Updated each time an alarm occurs. If the new alarm
is the same as an earlier one, the frequency increases
by one.)
㸿㹍㹁
-8=xxx
-9=xxx
-10=xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
5-16
5.2.12 Displaying alarm history and cause
Menu screen
Operation screen
Press the PRG key on the operation screen to go to the
menu screen. Using ȁ and V keys, move the arrow at
the left end in the menu screen to select "8. ALM
CAUSE" and press the FUNC/DATA key to display
the alarm history on the LCD.
㸮
㸮
㻼㻾㻳
V
418 440 462
Hz
57 60
63
5. MAINTENANC
6.LOAD FCTR
7.ALM INF
э 8.ALM CAUSE
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
Using ȁ and V keys, select the desired alarm in the
displayed alarm history, and press the FUNC/DATA
key to display troubleshooting data of the selected
alarm.
㸮
Latest alarm
Alarm history
0/1=xxx
-1=xxx
-2=xxx
-3=xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
䂻
䌼
㸮
5=xxx
4=xxx
3=xxx
2=xxx
0/1= OH1
-1= LV
-2= OH1
-3= LV
1
15
3
1
Display
example
Latest alarm
OH1 Continuous one time
Another previous alarm
LV Continuous 15 times
Another alarm having occurred
before previous one
OH1 Continuous three times
Another alarm having occurred
before two previous ones
LV One time
Multiple alarms
(Current alarms are displayed according to the number
of alarms.)
0/1=xxx
-1=xxx
-2=xxx
-3=xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
Latest alarm history
Alarm history (-1 to -3)
(Updated each time an alarm occurs. If the new alarm
is the same as an earlier one, the frequency increases
by one.)
-4=xxx
-5=xxx
-6=xxx
-7=xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
Alarm history (-4 to -7)
(Updated each time an alarm occurs. If the new alarm
is the same as an earlier one, the frequency increases
by one.)
-8=xxx
-9=xxx
-10=xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
Alarm history (-8 to -10)
(Updated each time an alarm occurs. If the new alarm
is the same as an earlier one, the frequency increases
by one.)
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
㸿㹍㹁
If the data size of selected
alarms is too large to
overflow the screen, use ȁ
and V keys to scroll data.
Alarm cause screen
Description of the alarm selected in the [LED] alarm
history is displayed.
The cause of the alarm selected in the [LCD] alarm
history is displayed.
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
5-17
5.2.13 Copying data
Press the PRG key on the operation screen to go to the menu
screen. Using ȁ and V keys, move the arrow at the left end in
the menu screen to move the cursor to "9. DATA COPY" and
press the FUNC/DATA key to display the loading mode of data
copy on the LCD screen.
㸮
V
418 440 462
Hz
57 60
63
To change to loading, saving or verifying, use ȁ and V keys on
the loading mode screen.
㻼㻾㻳
㸮
㸮
6. LOAD FCTR
7. ALM INF
8. ALM CAUSE
э 9. DATA COPY
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
ҍ
<COPY; KP-CNV>
30-4
30-4
WRITE
ҍ
㹁㹍㹎㹗
<COPY; KP-CNV>
----30-4
READ
㸮
<COPY; KP-CNV>
30-4
30-4
READ
Reading only is
allowed if
EEPROM data is
invalid.
ҍ
㹁㹍㹎㹗
㸮
<COPY; KP-CNV>
30-4
30-4
WRITE
<COPY; KP-CNV>
30-4 = 30-4
VERIFY
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻰㻭㼀㻭
㹁㹍㹎㹗
㹁㹍㹎㹗
㹁㹍㹎㹗
<COPY; KP-CNV>
----30-4
READ
<COPY; KP-CNV>
30-4
30-4
WRITE
<COPY; KP-CNV>
30-4 = 30-4
VERIFY
20%
13/64
80%
51/64
80%
51/64
㸮
㸮
㸮
<COPY; KP-CNV>
30-4
30-4
READ
COMPLETE
100%
64/64
<COPY; KP-CNV>
30-4
30-4
WRITE
COMPLETE
100%
64/64
<COPY; KP-CNV>
30-4 = 30-4
VERIFY
COMPLETE
100%
64/64
ҍ
Follow the procedure below to copy data.
c Load the function code data on the keypad.
d Remove the keypad.
e Install the keypad to another converter.
f Save the function code data to the converter.
Using the verification function, you can verify the data recorded in the keypad against that recorded in the converter
and pick up changes.
5-18
Error handling of data copy function
Saving during operation
1)
Prohibition of change during operation
<COPY; KP-CNV>
30-2
30-2
WRITE
CNV RUNNING
If data is saved during converter operation or if the
converter is started during saving operation, an
error occurs and the screen shows as shown on the
right.
Stop the converter and press RESET, then repeat
saving.
2)
Press RESET then PRG to interrupt.
EEPROM checksum error
No EEPROM data
Memory error
<COPY; KP-CNV>
55-4
160-4
WRITE
MEMORY ERROR
If data is saved though data has not been saved in
the data loading mode to the data memory of the
keypad (empty data), or if the converter type
(capacity, model, voltage class, etc.) specified in
the data having been loaded with data loading
function is different from the type of the converter
to which data is being saved, an error occurs and
the screen shows as shown on the right.
3)
Press F/D to continue, or RESET then
PRG to interrupt.
Verify error
Verify error
<COPY; KP-CNV>
30-2 㸻 30-2
VERIFY
ERR: F02
3%
2/64
If difference from converter data is found during
data verification in the data kept in the memory of
the keypad, the function code number is displayed
and an error is displayed as shown on the right,
while the data check function is temporarily
stopped.
Press F/D to continue, or RESET then
PRG to interrupt.
To continue the data check function and search for
other differences, press FUNC/DATA; to terminate
the data check function to do another process, press
RESET.
4)
Data protected with F00
<COPY; KP-CNV>
30-2
30-2
WRITE
DATA PRTCTD
1%
1/64
Data protection
If data is protected using F00, the screen shows as
shown on the right. To continue saving, change the
F00 setting to enable data change.
Press RESET then PRG to interrupt.
5-19
6 Description of Function Codes
6.1 Function Code Tables
Table 6.1-1
High performance functions
Extension terminal functions
Fundamental functions
Function
Function Codes
Function codes
Data setting range
Code
Name
F00
F01
F02
Data protection
Harmonics suppressing filter (Connection selection)
Restart mode after momentary power failure
Switching between MD and LD drive modes
(Current rating switching)
LED monitor (Item selection)
LCD monitor (Item selection)
LCD monitor (Language selection)
LCD monitor (Contrast adjustment)
Carrier frequency
Terminal [X1] function
Terminal [Y1] function
Terminal [Y2] function
Terminal [Y3] function
Terminal [Y5] function
Terminal [Y11] function
Terminal [Y12] function
Terminal [Y13] function
Terminal [Y14] function
Functions for optional
OPC-VG7-DIO
Terminal [Y15] function
Terminal [Y16] function
Terminal [Y17] function
Terminal [Y18] function
I/O function (Normally open/closed)
Converter overload early warning level
Cooling fan ON/OFF control
Current limiting signal (Hysteresis width)
Terminal [AO1] function
Terminal [AO4] function
Functions for optional
OPC-VG7-AIO
Terminal [AO5] function
F03
F04
F05
F06
F07
F08
E01
E02
E03
E04
E05
E06
E07
E08
E09
E10
E11
E12
E13
E14
E15
E16
E17
E18
E19
E20
E21
E22
E23
E24
E25
E26
E27
AO1 gain
AO4 gain
AO5 gain
AO1 bias
AO4 bias
AO5 bias
AO1-AO5 filter
H01
Station address (RS-485)
H02
Error processing
H03
Timer
H04
H05
H06
H07
Baud rate (RS-485)
Data length (RS-485)
Parity check (RS-485)
Stop bits (RS-485)
Communications link break
time (Timeout) (RS-485)
Response interval (RS-485)
Protocol selection (RS-485)
H08
H09
H10
Functions for optional
OPC-VG7-AIO
Functions for optional
OPC-VG7-AIO
Function for built-in
RS-485
Common functions for
communications
options and RS-485
Functions for built-in
RS-485
6-1
Min.
increment
unit
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
Factory default
0
0
0
0 or 1
0
1
-
0 to 14
1
-
0000 to 007F
50 to 105%
0 or 1
0 to 30%
1
1
1
%
%
0 to 10
1
-
-100.00 to 100.00
(times)
0.01
(times)
-100.0 to 100.0%
0.1
%
0.000 to 0.500 s
0.001
s
0
2
0
5
5
4
0
2
3
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0000
80
0
10
1
0
0
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.010
0 to 255
1
-
1
0 to 3
1
-
3
0.01 to 20.00 s
0.01
s
2.00
0 to 5
0 to 2
0 to 2
0 to 10
5 to 15
0 to 4
0 to 4
0 or 1
0 to 2
0 or 1
1
-
2
0
0
0
0.0 to 60.0 s
0.1
s
60.0
0.00 to 1.00 s
0 to 3
0.01
1
s
-
0.05
0
User application functions
High performance functions
Function
Function codes
Code
Data setting range
Name
Function for
OPC-VG7-TL
H11
TL transmission format
H12
Parallel system
Functions for
Number of slave stations in OPC-VG7-SI,
OPC-VG7-SIR
parallel system
Alarm data deletion
Current limiter valve (Driving 1)
Current limiter valve (Driving 2)
Current limiter valve (Braking 1)
Current limiter valve (Braking 2)
Current limiter early warning (Level)
Current limiter early warning (Timer)
Reserved.
Functions for optional
SX bus station number
OPC-VG7-SX
monitor
Reserved.
AVR control response
DC voltage command mode
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
H13
H14
H15
H16
H17
H18
H19
H20
U01
U02
U03
U04
U05
U06
U07
U08
U09
U10
Min.
increment
unit
0 or 1
0 or 1
Factory default
0
1
-
0
1 to 5
1
0 or 1
0
150
150
-150
-150
100
0
0
0 to 150%
-150 to 0%
-150 to 150%
0 to 60 s
-32768 to 32767
1
%
1
s
-32768 to 32767
0
0000 to FFFF
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
0000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
-
Note 1: U01 and U06 to U10 are the function codes for particular manufacturers. Do not change the factory defaults.
Note 2: On the keypad, U codes are displayed as USER P1 to USER P10.
Note 3: The data of shaded function codes ( ) can be changed when the converter is running. To change the data of other
function codes, stop the converter.
6-2
6.2 Details of Function Codes
F codes (Fundamental functions)
F00
Data protection
F03
F00 specifies whether to protect function code data
from accidentally getting changed from the keypad.
When the data is protected, the "DATA PRTCTD"
displays on the LCD monitor.
Switching between MD and LD drive modes
(Current rating switching)
F03 switches between the MD (CT) and LD (VT) drive
modes. The standard setting is "0" (MD mode). "100%"
means the rated current of the converter unit.
To change the F00 data, press STOP + ȁ or V.
Setting data
Setting data Data protection
0
Allow data change
1
Protect data
F01
0
1
Current rating
switching
MD (CT) mode
LD (VT) mode
Overload
150%, 1 min.
110%, 1 min.
Note: Selecting the LD (VT) mode increases the rated
current of the converter unit. When switching to the LD
(VT) mode, change the external reactor and other
peripheral devices, too.
Harmonics suppressing filter
(Connection selection)
The factory default is "0."
The converter is usually connected with the filter, so
leave the F01 default as it is.
F04
F04 specifies the running status item (listed below) to
be monitored on the LED monitor. "100%" of input
power 1 means the rated capacity of the converter unit.
Setting data Harmonics suppressing filter
0
With filter
1
Without filter
Setting data
0
1
2
3
4
5
Note: Be sure to connect the filter circuit to the
converter; otherwise, harmonics will be omitted,
damaging other devices.
F02
Restart mode after momentary power failure
F02 specifies the action to be taken by the converter in
the event of a momentary power failure. When F02 = 0,
the converter activates the undervoltage protective
function; when F02 = 1, the converter automatically
restarts after restoration of source voltage.
F05
0
1
Function
Input power 1
Input power 2
Input current (rms)
Input voltage (rms)
DC link bus voltage
Source frequency
%
kW
A
V
V
Hz
Unit
16 bits
16 bits
16 bits
16 bits
10 bits
LCD monitor (Item selection)
F05 selects the display contents of the LCD monitor in
the Running mode. For each monitor screen, refer to
Section 5.2.2 "Screen immediately after the main
circuit power supply is turned on."
If the circuit across terminals [RUN] and [CM] is
short-circuited, an undervoltage alarm occurs when the
power is shut down. To avoid this, it is recommended to
set F02 to "1."
Setting data
LED monitor (Item selection)
Setting data LCD monitor (Item selection)
0
Operation guide screen
1
Bar graph of running data 1
(Input power and input current (rms))
2
Bar graph of running data 2
(Source voltage fluctuation and source
frequency fluctuation)
Restart mode after momentary
power failure
Disable
Enable
6-3
F06
F08
LCD monitor (Language selection)
F06 selects the language to display on the LCD
monitor.
Setting data
0
1
2
F07
Carrier frequency
The carrier frequency is fixed at 5 kHz even if any
value is set to F08. When the OPC-VG7-SIR is
mounted, it is fixed at 2.5 kHz.
Language
Japanese
English
Chinese
LCD monitor (Contrast adjustment)
F59 adjusts the contrast of the LCD monitor. Increasing
the setting data increases the contrast and decreasing it
decreases the contrast
Setting data
Contrast
0, 1 , 2,㺃㺃㺃㺃㺃, 8, 9, 10
Low
High
E codes (Extension terminal functions)
E01
Terminal [X1] function
< Configuring contacts as a "normally open" or
"normally closed" contact" >
E01 defines the function of digital input terminal X1.
Setting data
0
1
2
3
4
Function
Enable external alarm trip
Cancel current limiters
73 answerback
Switch current limiter values
Option DI
Symbol
THR
LMT-CCL
73ANS
I-LIM
OPT-DI
Contacts can be configured as a "normally open" or
"normally closed" contact, with Function code E14 (I/O
function (Normally open/closed)). For details, refer to
the description of E14.
Function code data = 0
Enable external alarm trip -- THR
Setting procedure
Upon receipt of THR, the converter trips with alarm
J. This signal is internally held, so an input of RST
resets the tripped state. Use this signal to stop the
converter because of a failure of an external device.
• Select the desired function. Take "73 Answerback" for
example.
• To assign the "73 answerback" function to [X1], set
E01 to "2" (73ANS).
The factory default is a "normally open" contact. To use
it as a "normally closed" contact, use Function code
E14 to change the setting.
• Turn the terminal [X1] (73ANS) ON from an external
device to supply a 73 answerback signal.
• Check if the ON/OFF status of
[X1] is acknowledged, on the I/O
check screen of the keypad.
Turning [X1] ON changes †X1
to „X1 in the figure shown at the
right.
㸮
Function code data = 1
Cancel current limiters -- LMT-CCL
‫ڧ‬RUN‫ڧ‬Y1 ‫ڧ‬Y5A
‫ڧ‬RST ‫ڧ‬Y2
‫ڦ‬X1
‫ڧ‬Y3
AO1
=sxx.xV
This digital input signal cancels the current limiters
defined by H15 through H18. Upon receipt of
LMT-CCL, the converter disables all those current
limiters.
• When the terminal is accessed via
the communications link, use the
same screen for checking.
6-4
Function code data = 2
73 answerback -- 73ANS
E02 to E13
E02 through E13 assign part of control and monitor
signals to output terminals [Y1] through [Y3], [Y5],
and [Y11] through [Y18].
Since the charging circuit is configured outside the
converter, use this function to add an auxiliary contact
of the charging circuit magnetic contactor (73) to the
ready-to-run conditions of the converter.
Setting
data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
When E01 = 2, if the converter receives no 73ANS
within 500 ms after the charging circuit control output
(73A, 73C) is activated, then the converter trips with
alarm RDH.
Since this condition is judged only when the main
circuit power of the converter is turned ON; the
converter does not trip if the 73ANS is turned OFF
when the main circuit power is ON.
Power-on (52)
Charging circuit
control output (73A)
73 answerback (73ANS)
10
DC link bus voltage
RDH alarm
500 ms
11
12
13
14
500 ms
t
Note: When E01 z 2, no RDH alarm occurs.
ON
Symbol
Converter running
Converter ready to run
Source current limiting
Lifetime alarm
Heat sink overheat early warning
Overload early warning
Power running
Regenerating
Current limiter early warning
Restarting after momentary
power failure
In synchronization with source
frequency
Alarm content
Alarm content
Alarm content
Option DO
RUN
RDY
IL
LIFE
PRE-OH
PRE-OL
DRV
REG
CUR
U-RES
SY-HZ
AL1
AL2
AL4
OPT-DO
• Select the desired function. Take "Converter ready to
run" for example.
• Assign "Converter ready to run" function to one of
the available contacts (Y1 to Y3, Y5A, and Y11 to
Y18). To assign it to Y3, for example, set E04 to "1"
(RDY).
This digital input signal switches the current limiter
values defined by H15 to H18.
OFF
Function
Setting procedure
Function code data = 3
Switch current limiter values -- I-LIM
Function code data
3
Y terminals functions
• Turn the power ON. When the converter is ready to
run, the terminal [Y3] comes ON.
Current limiter values to apply
H15 (Drive 1),
H17 (Brake 1)
H16 (Drive 2),
H18 (Brake 2)
• Check if the ON/OFF status of
[Y3] is acknowledged, on the I/O
check screen of the keypad.
Changing [Y3] from "normally
open" to "normally closed"
changes †Y3 to „Y3 in the
figure shown at the right.
Function code data = 4
Option DI -- OPT-DI
Use this function for special purposes. This function is
selected by factory default; however, there is no effect
on the control action.
㸮
‫ڧ‬RUN ‫ڧ‬Y1 ‫ڧ‬Y5A
‫ڧ‬RST ‫ڧ‬Y2
‫ڧ‬X1
AO1
‫ڦ‬Y3
=sxx.xV
< Configuring contacts as a "normally open" or
"normally closed" contact" >
Contacts can be configured as a "normally open" or
"normally closed" contact, with Function code E14 (I/O
function (Normally open/closed)). For details, refer to
the description of E14.
6-5
Function code data = 0
Converter running -- RUN
Function code data = 4
Heat sink overheat early warning -- PRE-OH
This output signal comes ON when the converter
outputs a voltage (during boosting of DC link bus
voltage).
This signal comes ON when the temperature of the heat
sink reaches a temperature 5°C lower than the "heat
sink overheat alarm (J )" level (X°C).
Note: If the DC link bus voltage drops due to a
momentary power failure, the converter comes to a stop,
turning the RUN off.
The heat sink overheat alarm level (X°C) varies
according to the combination of the converter capacity
and the current rating level (MD (CT) or LD (VT)
mode), and it is fixed within the range of approximately
70°C to 110°C.
Function code data = 1
Converter ready to run -- RDY
Heat sink overheat
early warning
This output signal comes ON when the converter
becomes ready to run after the main circuit power is
supplied and a RUN command is entered.
Hysteresis: 10
10
Active
5
Temperature
of heat sink
Inactive
This signal is used as an interlock signal for a run
command of the inverter connected with the converter,
as shown in the basic connection diagram.
X-15
Function code data = 2
Source current limiting -- IL
X-5 X
Heat sink overheat
alarm level: X
Function code data = 5
Overload early warning -- PRE-OL
This output signal comes ON when the current
command value is limited by current limiter values
(H15 to H18).
This output signal comes ON when the converter
overload reaches the converter overload early warning
level specified by E15. For details, refer to the
description of E15.
The hysteresis width for prevention of chattering of
signal output is set with E17 "Current limiting signal."
Function code data = 6
Power running -- DRV
Function code data = 7
Regenerating -- REG
Function code data = 3
Lifetime alarm -- LIFE
This output signal comes ON when the cumulative run
time of any of the DC link bus capacitor (smoothing
capacitor), electrolytic capacitors on the control printed
circuit board, and cooling fan inside the converter has
approached the end of the service life.
The DRV or REG output signal is turned ON during
power running or regeneration of the converter,
respectively. During no-load running (with current
command within 3%), the converter is in the RUN state
and both the DRV and REG are turned OFF.
The life judgment depends on the following. The
cumulative run time information can be monitored on
the maintenance info screen in real time.
The state can be monitored on the running screen
(GUIDANC) of the keypad.
Part
Life judgment level
DC link bus capacitor Cumulative 87,600 hours
(Cumulative power-on hours of
main circuit)
Electrolytic
Cumulative 87,600 hours
capacitors on control (Cumulative control power-on
printed circuit board hours of converter)
Cooling fans
87,600 hours
This is the estimated life of the
cooling fan at ambient
temperature of 30°C.
Current reference
value of converter
-
-3%
-1%
0
1%
3%
+
RUN
DRV
REG
: Hysteresis width zone
This function should be used merely as a guide. Daily
inspection and periodic inspection are necessary to
avoid failures and to continue reliable operation over a
long time.
6-6
Function code data = 8
Current limiter early warning -- CUR
Function code data = 11, 12, 13
Alarm content -- AL1, AL2, AL4
This output signal comes ON when the current
command value exceeds the current limiter early
warning level specified by H19 and it is kept for the
timer period specified by H20.
The combination of these output signals shows the
activation state of the converter protective functions.
Output terminals
Alarm content
(Converter protective function) [AL1] [AL2] [AL4]
No alarm
OFF
OFF
OFF
Current error
ON
OFF
OFF
(AOC, ACE)
Voltage error
OFF
ON
OFF
(AOU, dOU, ALU, dLU)
Main circuit error
ON
ON
OFF
(ACF, PbF, Er8)
Input error or external fault
OFF
OFF
ON
(LPU, FrE, OH2)
CPU, operation or
communications error
ON
OFF
ON
(Er1, Er2, Er3, Er4, Er6, Erb)
Overheat or overload
OFF
ON
ON
(OH1, OH3, OLU)
Others (Ar1 to Ar8)
ON
ON
ON
This signal enables the converter to reduce the load
before the current limiter function is activated.
Current command value
Current limiter
activation level
Early warning
level (H19)
Early warning Early warning
timer (H20)
timer (H20)
CUR
t
Function code data = 14
Option DO -- OPT-DO
Function code data = 9
Restarting after momentary power failure -- U-RES
Provided for particular manufacturers.
This output signal comes ON when the converter
detects a momentary power failure and shuts off its
output. After the power is restored and the DC link bus
voltage exceeds the undervoltage recovery level, this
signal goes OFF.
E14
I/O function (Normally open/closed)
E14 configures contacts RUN, X1, Y1 to Y3, Y5 and
30RY individually as a "normally open" or "normally
closed" contact by software.
If such a long-time power failure that the control power
of the converter is lost occurs when the U-RES is ON,
then restoring the power causes the converter to start in
the regular startup sequence with the U-RES being
OFF.
OP: Open
CL: Closed
E14 I/O OP/CL
OP
CL
RUN X1 Y1 2 3 5 30
Function code data = 10
In synchronization with source frequency -- SY-HZ
Setting data
State
0
Normally open
1
Normally closed
This output signal comes ON when the control
frequency inside the converter is synchronized with the
source frequency. It goes OFF upon detection of
out-of-synchronization, momentary power failure, or
frequency alarm.
E15
Converter overload early warning level
E15 specifies the overload early warning signal level to
apply before the overload protective function is
activated.
This signal may go OFF when there is distortion or
dipping in the source voltage waveform due to adverse
power supply conditions.
To issue an overload early warning, set E15 to less than
100%. When E15 = 100%, the early warning will be
issued at the same timing as the overload alarm.
I
Setting range: 50 to 105%
The overload early warning will be issued when
PRE-OL is assigned to any of control terminals [Y1]
through [Y3], [Y5], and [Y11] through [Y18] using any
of E02 to E13.
6-7
E16
Cooling fan ON/OFF control
E16 specifies whether to detect the temperature of the
heat sink inside the converter and control the cooling
fan ON/OFF automatically.
The standard specification is "0" (Disable).
Setting data
0
1
Cooling fan ON/OFF control
Disable (Always in operation)
Enable (ON/OFF control)
Note: The cooling fan works when the converter is
running irrespective of the E16 setting.
E17
Current limiting signal (Hysteresis width)
E17 specifies the hysteresis width of the source current
limiting signal IL.
Setting range: 0 to 30%
IL
ON
Current
command value
OFF
Hysteresis
width Current limiter
value
(E17)
H15, H16
E18 to E20
AO terminals functions
E18 through E20 assign signals to analog output
terminals [AO1], [AO4] and [AO5] and select AO
adjustment signals.
Setting
data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Function
Input power
Input current (rms)
Input voltage (rms)
DC link bus voltage
Source frequency
+10V output test
-10V output test
Symbol
PWR
I-AC
V-AC
V-DC
FREQ
P10
N10
Setting procedure
• Check the devices such as a meter to be connected to
AO terminals together with wiring. Setting "5"
enables a +10V output test.
Scale
±200%/±10V
+200%/+10V
500 V/10 V
1000 V/ 10V
100 Hz/10 V
---
• Select the desired function. Take "DC link bus
voltage" for example.
• Assign "DC link bus voltage" function to one of the
available AO terminals ([AO1], [AO4] and [AO5]).
To assign it to [AO1], for example, set E18 (Terminal
[AO1] function) to "3" (V-DC).
* Do not set "7" or larger value to E18 to E20 since they are
for adjustment by Fuji.
* [AO4] and [AO5] are available
OPC-VG7-AIO is mounted.
only
when
• The voltage issued onto the
terminal [AO1] can be checked
on the I/O check screen of the
keypad.
the
• The gain, bias, and filter can be
specified with E21 to E23, E24 to
E26, and E27, respectively, for
analog outputs.
6-8
㸮
‫ڧ‬581‫<ڧ<ڧ‬$
‫ڧ‬567‫<ڧ‬
‫<ڧ;ڧ‬
$2 9
Function
Bias
Gain
Application
Setting bias. For details, refer to the description of E24 to E26.
Use gain to view a small output range of data in an enlarged scale or to view a wide output range of data
in a reduced scale. Enter a negative value to inverse the polarity. For details, refer to the description of
E21 to E23.
There is no need to change from the factory default 0.010 s (10 ms). If wiring between the AO terminal
and the device (e.g., meter) or the device itself is susceptible to noise, this filter function has no effect.
Take measures against noise outside the terminal. For details, refer to the description of E27.
Filter
Voltage output
Output resolution
1 bit
+12 V
The AO output is the result of D/A conversion of a 12-bit digital
output. Because 11 bits (2047) on a single side are issued to the
half scale (+12V), the output resolution is 5.86 mV. Accordingly
the binary number for 10 V becomes 1705 (2047 x 10/12).
5.86 mV (12 V/2047)
Internal data
0
+2047 (11 bits)
-12V
4095 (12 bits)
Output cycle
Signals are output in sampling cycle of approximately 500 P s.
1: Input current (rms) I-AC
0: Input power PWR
2: Input voltage (rms) V-AC
4: Source frequency FREQ
Lf
Lr
52
3: DC link bus voltage V-DC
R0
Converter
F
L1/R
P(+)
Inverter
P(+)
L2/S
L3/T
Filter
Rf
U
V
N(-)
N(-)
W
73
E(G)
Cf
To control
terminal
To control
terminal
5: +10V output test P10
6: -10V output test N10
+10V and -10V fixed values are output for adjustment of analog output.
6-9
E(G)
Motor
M
E21 to E23
E27
AO gain setting
AO1-AO5 filter setting
E21 to E23 specify the gain for analog outputs AO1,
AO4 and AO5, respectively.
E27 specifies the output filter time constant for all
analog outputs AO1, AO4 and AO5.
Setting range: -100.00 to 100. 00 (times)
Setting range: 0.000 to 0.500 (s)
Note: [AO4] and [AO5] are available only when the
OPC-VG7-AIO option is mounted.
Note: [AO4] and [AO5] are available only when the
OPC-VG7-AIO option is mounted.
Output voltage
+10V
2.50
1.00
0.50
-10V
Control internal data
0
+10V
-1.00
-10V
E24 to E26
-2.50
AO bias setting
E24 to E26 specify the bias for analog outputs AO1,
AO4 and AO5, respectively.
Setting range: -100.0 to 100.0 (%)
Note: [AO4] and [AO5] are available only when the
OPC-VG7-AIO option is mounted.
Output voltage
+10V
100.0%
0.0%
-40.0%
-10V
Control internal data
0
+10V
-100.0%
-10V
H codes (High performance functions)
H01
Station address (RS-485)
H03
Timer
H01 specifies the station address for the RS-485
communications link.
H03 specifies an error processing timer for RS-485,
T-Link, SX bus or CC-Link.
Setting range: 0 to 255
The timer is available when H02 = 1 or 2.
Setting range: 0.01 to 20.00 (s)
H02
Error processing
H02 specifies the error processing to be performed if a
communications error occurs in RS-485, T-Link, SX
bus or CC-Link.
Setting data
Function
0
Forcibly stop (GT )
1
Run for the period specified by H03 and
then trip.
Trip if a communications error persists
2
exceeding the period specified by H03.
3
Continue to run.
6-10
H04
H09
Baud rate (RS-485)
H04 specifies the transmission speed for RS-485
communication.
Setting data
0
1
2
3
4
H05
H09 specifies the latency time after receipt of a query
sent from the host equipment until sending of the
response via the RS-485 communications link.
Transmission speed
38400 bps
19200 bps
9600 bps
4800 bps
2400 bps
This function allows the converter to send a response
timely to a PC whose response is slow.
Setting range: 0.00 to 1.00 (s)
H10
Setting data
0
1
2
3
For the SX protocol or Modbus RTU protocol, the data
length is fixed at 8 bits irrespective of the H05 setting.
For details, refer to Chapter 9 "Using Standard RS-485
Interface."
Parity check (RS-485)
H11
Setting data
0
1
2
Setting data TL transmission format
0
4W + 4W
1
8W + 8W
Parity
None
Even parity
Odd parity
For details, refer to Chapter 10 "Control Options."
H12
Stop bits (RS-485)
Parallel system
H12 specifies whether to enable the parallel system
functions using the OPC-VG7-SI (SIR) option.
H07 specifies the number of stop bits for RS-485
communication.
For the SX protocol, the setting is fixed at 1 bit.
Setting data
0
1
TL transmission format
H11 specifies the transmission format to be used in
transmission via the T-Link with the OPC-VG7-TL
option.
For the SX protocol, the setting is fixed at even parity
irrespective of the H06 setting.
H08
Protocol
Fuji's general-purpose inverter protocol
SX protocol (Loader protocol)
Modbus RTU protocol
Trace protocol
Setting data Data length
0
8 bits
1
7 bits
H06 specifies the property of the parity bit for RS-485
communication.
H07
Protocol selection (RS-485)
H10 specifies the communications protocol for RS-485
communication.
Data length (RS-485)
H05 specifies the character length for RS-485
communication.
H06
Response interval (RS-485)
Setting data Parallel system
0
Disable
1
Enable
Stop bits
2 bits
1 bit
For details of this function, contact your Fuji Electric
representative.
Communications link break time (Timeout)
(RS-485)
H13
H08 specifies the time interval from when the converter
detects no access due to a wire break until it outputs a
trip signal. This applies to a system that always
accesses its station within a predetermined interval
during
communication
using
the
RS-485
communications link.
Number of slave stations in parallel system
H13 specifies the number of slave stations (excluding
master) available in the parallel system using the
OPC-VG7-SI (SIR) option.
Setting range: 1 to 5
For details of this function, contact your Fuji Electric
representative.
Setting range: 0.1 to 60.0 (s)
(When H08 = 0: No detection)
6-11
H14
H19, H20
Alarm data deletion
Setting H14 to "1" deletes all the alarm history and
alarm information held in the converter.
Current limiter early warning
(Level, Timer)
If the current command value exceeds the current
limiter early warning level specified by H19 and it is
kept for the timer period specified by H20, then the
converter issues the current limiter early warning
(CUR).
After that, the H14 data automatically reverts to "0."
Setting range: 0 or 1
For details, refer to the description of the Y terminals
functions (E02 to E13).
H15 to H18 Current limiter values
(Drive 1 or 2, Brake 1 or 2)
Setting range: (Level) -150 to 150%
(Timer) 0 to 60 (s)
The current limiter values can be specified in two
ways--one using H15 to H18 and the other via the
communications link.
To select those values, use the digital input signals
LMT-CCL (Cancel current limiters) and I-LIM (Switch
current limiter values). For details, refer to the
description of E01 (Terminal [X1] function).
Setting range: (Driving) 0 to 150%
(Braking) -150 to 0%
U codes (User application functions)
U01
(Reserved)
U03
(Reserved)
Function code reserved for particular manufacturers. Do
not change the setting from the factory default.
Function code reserved for particular manufacturers. Do
not change the setting from the factory default.
Changing the setting from the factory default could
influence converter running.
Accidents or injury may result.
Changing the setting from the factory default could
influence converter running.
Accidents or injury may result.
U02
SX bus station number monitor
This function code applies only when the SX bus option
card (OPC-VG7-SX) is used.
U02 reads out the SX bus station number allocated to
the converter itself by the MICREX-SX, depending
upon the system configuration. (Read-only function)
Note: The U02 data is displayed in decimal. When
setting the station number with the rotary switches,
however, use the hexadecimal value.
6-12
U04
U06 to U10
AVR control response
U04 adjusts the control response of the automatic
voltage regulator (AVR).
Function codes reserved for particular manufacturers.
Do not change these settings from the factory defaults.
If the output DC voltage or the input current is not
stabilized when the converter is running due to the
applied system, then use this function code for
adjustment.
Changing the setting from the factory default could
influence converter running.
Setting data AVR operation mode
Standard high-response mode
(In combination with the same capacity
0
inverter)
Control mode 1
(Applying to a generator power supply or
1
for two or more converters combined)
Control mode 2
2
(Others)
Accidents or injury may result.
U04 = 0 (Standard high-response mode):
Select this setting when the converter is used in
combination with an inverter of the same capacity and it
is connected with the commercial power supply.
U04 = 1 (Control mode 1):
Select this setting when
- the converter applies to a battery or generator power
supply,
- the converter is used in combination with an inverter
of the different capacity or in combination with two or
more inverters in DC common connection, or
- two or more converters are connected with the same
power supply so that the input current is not
stabilized.
U04 = 2 (Control mode 2):
This setting suppresses the control response. Select this
setting when the DC voltage or input current is not
stabilized even when U04 = 1.
U05
DC voltage command mode
When the converter runs, the output DC voltage is
boosted from the rectified voltage of the source voltage
to a constant value.
The factory default is a variable mode based on the
source voltage (U05 = 0). Using U05 enables a fixed
mode in which the output DC voltage is constant
irrespective of the source voltage, just as the previous
models.
Setting data Control mode
0
Variable mode
1
Fixed mode
(Equivalent to
previous
models)
(Reserved)
DC voltage command value
320 to 355 V (200 V)
640 to 710 V (400 V)
340 V (200 V)
680 V (400 V)
6-13
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 List of Protective Functions
When resetting the alarm stop state, be sure to check that a run signal is OFF beforehand. Resetting it with the
RUN and CM being short-circuited may cause a sudden restart.
Accidents may result.
If an alarm occurs in the converter, the converter activates the protective function to immediately stop (trip) itself
and displays an alarm code on the LED monitor. Remove the cause that has activated the protective function or
replace faulty parts, and then enter a reset command to cancel the protective function and restart converter operation.
Even if a reset command is entered without removal of the alarm cause, the protective function cannot be canceled.
For the description of alarms, refer to Table 7.1-1.
Table 7.1-1
Name of alarm
Alarm Indication and List of Protective Functions
Indication
Description
AC fuse blown
ACF
The AC fuse outside the converter is blown out due to a short or broken internal
circuit.
AC overcurrent
AOC
The momentary AC current has exceeded the overcurrent detection level due to
a short circuit or grounding fault in the power supply circuit.
The source AC voltage has dropped below the undervoltage detection level
during converter operation.
AC undervoltage
ALV
Note that no alarm is issued when F02 (Restart Mode After Momentary Power
Failure) = 1.
AC undervoltage detection level (400 V system: 176 Vrms)
AC input current error
ACE
The difference between the current reference value of the converter and the
detected input AC power value has exceeded the input current error detection
level.
Note that no alarm is issued when F02 (Restart Mode After Momentary Power
Failure) = 1.
AC overvoltage
DC overvoltage
AOV
dOV
The source AC voltage has exceeded the AC overvoltage detection level.
AC overvoltage detection level (400 V system: 552 Vrms)
The regenerative current of the inverter has increased (until the regenerative
energy has exceeded the braking capacity) so that the DC link bus voltage has
exceeded the DC overvoltage detection level.
DC overvoltage detection level (400 V system: 800 Vdc)
The DC link bus voltage has dropped below the undervoltage detection level
due to a voltage drop of the power supply during converter operation.
DC undervoltage
dLV
Note that no alarm is issued when F02 (Restart Mode After Momentary Power
Failure) = 1.
DC undervoltage detection level (400 V system: 371 Vdc)
This function works immediately after the power is turned ON.
Input phase loss
LPV
The converter has stopped due to a phase loss in the three-phase power supply
connected to main power inputs L1/R, L2/S and L3/T or an interphase voltage
unbalance in the three-phase source voltage.
To reset the alarm state, restart the converter.
7-1
Name of alarm
Power line frequency
synchronization error
Indication
FrE
Description
The detected source frequency has gone out of the range from 46 to 54 Hz or 56
to 64 Hz (immediately after power-on only) or it has exceeded the "basic
frequency (50/60 Hz) ±15%," or the standard deviation of the source frequency
multiplied by three (3V) has exceeded 5 Hz (at the time of a run command
input).
Note that no alarm is issued when F02 (Restart Mode After Momentary Power
Failure) = 1.
This function is enabled only when 73ANS (73 answerback) is selected using
the X1 function.
There has been no X1 input (that is, the output signals of charging circuit has
not output or the magnetic contactor for bypassing the charging circuit has not
closed) within 0.5 sec after the charging circuit control output 73A signal was
issued. To reset the alarm stop state, change the X1 function selection or restart
the converter.
Charging circuit error
PbF
Heat sink overheat
OH1
Due to a stop of the cooling fan(s), etc., the temperature around the heat sink
that cools down semiconductor elements of the main circuit has risen.
External alarm
OH2
The converter has stopped due to the entry of the external signal THR.
Overheat inside
converter
OH3
The temperature around the control printed circuit board has risen due to poor
ventilation inside the converter.
The AC source current has exceeded the inverse-time characteristic overload
level of the converter shown in Figure 7.1-1.
Converter overload
OLU
Memory error
Er1
A data writing error or other errors in the memory have occurred.
Keypad
communications error
Er2
A keypad transmission error has occurred.
CPU error
Er3
A CPU error has occurred.
Er4
When the converter was driven through the communications link such as
RS-485, T-Link, SX bus or CC-Link, a transmission error has occurred due to
noise.
Network device error
For MD (CT) mode: 150% / 60 s
For LD (VT) mode: 110% / 60 s
This alarm is caused by a PLC failure, wire break in the communication path, or
failure of options.
Operation procedure
error
Er6
Two or more network option boards (T-Link, SX Bus, or CC-Link) are mounted.
A/D converter error
Er8
An error has occurred in the A/D converter circuit.
Optical network error
Erb
A transmission error has occurred in the communications link between
converters using high-speed serial cards (SI or SIR option).
7-2
LD (VT) mode
480
480
420
420
360
360
䊻 Action time (s)
䊻 Action time (s)
MD (CT) mode
300
240
300
240
180
180
120
120
60
60
0
80
100
120
140
160
0
180
80
100
䊻 Converter input current (%)
(100%: Rated converter input current)
120
140
䊻 Converter input current (%)
(100%: Rated converter input current)
Figure 7.1-1 Overload Trip Time
RHC…S/B-4DE
132
160
200
220
280
315
630
710
800
Rated input
MD(CT) mode
233
282
353
385
489
550
1099
1239
1396
current (A)
LD(VT) mode
282
353
385
-
550
619
1239
1396
1746
7.2 Error Reset
To reset a tripped converter, remove the cause and then press the RESET key on the keypad or enter a reset
command RST from the control input terminal.
Before turning the reset signal ON, be sure to turn a run command OFF. Otherwise, the converter restarts running
after reset. It is dangerous.
7-3
7.3 Troubleshooting
When the protective function is activated:
(1) Overcurrent (AOC)
Overcurrent
AOC
Perform wiring correctly.
NO
Remove the short circuit
or grounding fault.
YES
Reduce the load or
select a converter
having a larger capacity.
YES
Connect the converter
to the suitable power
supply.
YES
Is the phase order of wiring at L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R1, S1
and T1 correct?
YES
Is there a short circuit or grounding fault in wiring or
devices in the AC or DC circuit?
NO
Is the load too large?
NO
Does the source voltage exceed the specification?
NO
Failure of the converter is probable.
Contact FUJI.
(2) AC fuse blown (ACF)
[RHC630B~800B-4D]
AC fuse blown
ACF
Are the phase order in the wiring
to the AC fuse blowout detection
terminals R2 and T2 correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
Are devices other than those
specified in the basic connection
diagram connected between the
charging circuit magnetic
contactor and converter?
NO
The wiring inside the
converter may be shortcircuited. Contact FUJI.
7-4
YES
Remove devices
not specified in the
basic connection
diagram.
(3) Overvoltage (AOV, dOV)
Overvoltage
AOV,dOV
Perform wiring correctly.
Reduce the source
voltage to within the
upper limit.
NO
NO
Is the phase order of wiring at L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R1, S1
and T1 correct?
Is the source voltage within the specification range?
YES
· Set a longer deceleration
time to the inverter.
· Examine the regeneration
load.
· Examine the converter
capacity.
Is there a power failure during regeneration operation?
YES
NO
YES
Is the regeneration load too large?
NO
Set a longer
acceleration time to the
inverter.
YES
Internal converter
adjustment is required.
YES
Is the function activated at the end of quick acceleration?
NO
Is the function activated when the load is quickly reduced?
NO
Is a generator used for AC power supply?
YES
NO
Contact FUJI.
7-5
The braking system must be
examined. Contact FUJI.
(4) Undervoltage (ALV, dLV)
Undervoltage
ALV,dLV
YES
Was there a power failure (incl.
momentary one)?
Reset and restart operation.
NO
Is there any defective device or
poor connection in the power
supply circuit?
YES
Replace defective devices
and correct connection.
NO
Check the sequence circuit of
the charging circuit magnetic
contactor.
NO
Examine the power supply
system to satisfy the
specifications.
NO
Does the charging circuit magnetic
contactor (73) go active only when
the power is turned on?
YES
Is the source voltage within the
specified range?
YES
YES
Is there any load requiring a large
starting current in the same power
supply system?
NO
Is this protective function
activated when the circuit
breaker or magnetic contactor
is turned ON?
YES
Is the power supply
transformer capacity correct?
NO
NO
YES
Is the DC (P-N) voltage of the main
circuit larger than the detection level
specified in Table 7.1-1?
YES
NO
A converter control
circuit failure or
malfunction caused by
noise is probable.
Contact FUJI.
The converter may be
broken. Contact FUJI.
(5) Overheat inside converter (OH3), heat sink overheat (OH1)
Overheat inside
converter
OH3
Heat sink overheat
OH1
Is the load too large?
YES
Reduce the load.
NO
Is the ambient temperature
within the specified range?
NO
YES
Is the cooling fan
rotating?
NO
Improve the environment to
keep the ambient
temperature within the
specified range.
Replace the cooling fan.
YES
Is the cooling airflow path
blocked?
NO
Converter failure or
malfunction caused by
noise is probable.
Contact FUJI.
7-6
YES
Remove obstacles.
Examine the power
supply transformer
capacity.
(6) Converter overload (OLU)
Converter overload
OLU
Is the load too large
or has it exceeded
the converter
overload capability?
YES
Reduce the load or select a
converter having a larger
capacity.
YES
Examine the operation
pattern or select a converter
having a larger capacity.
NO
Has acceleration/
deceleration repeated
frequently?
NO
Converter failure is
probable. Contact
FUJI.
(7) Memory error (Er1), CPU error (Er3)
Memory error, CPU error
Er1, Er3
Correct faults.
YES
Turn the power OFF temporarily.
After the charge lamp (CHARGE)
goes OFF, turn the power ON again.
Is the error code
removed?
Is there any noise
source in the vicinity?
NO
NO
Converter failure or
malfunction caused by
noise is probable.
Contact FUJI.
YES
The converter is normal.
Continue operation.
7-7
(8) Input phase loss (LPV)
Input phase loss
LPV
Are power supply wires
connected to all of
terminals L1/R, L2/S and
L3/T of the main circuit?.
NO
Connect power supply
wires to all the three
phases.
YES
Retighten the screws on
the terminal block.
YES
Are screws on the
terminal block loosened?
NO
Is the interphase voltage
unbalance large in the threephase source voltage?
YES
NO
Power supply failure.
Examine the power
supply system including
wiring.
Converter failure or
malfunction caused by
noise is probable.
Contact FUJI.
(9) A/D converter error (Er8)
A/D converter error
Er8
YES
Is there a short circuit or
dust accumulation on the
printed circuit board?
Correct faults.
NO
Converter failure or
malfunction caused by
noise is probable.
Contact FUJI.
7-8
(10) Power line frequency synchronization error (FrE)
Source frequency error
FrE
Is the source within the
range from 46 to 54 Hz or
56 to 64 Hz?
NO
Examine the power
supply system to
satisfy the
specifications.
YES
Are wires connected to
the AC power supply
detection terminals R1,
S1 and T1?
YES
NO
Is the power supply
transformer capacity
too small?
YES
Correct wiring.
Connect the converter
to the power supply
satisfying the specified
capacity requirement.
NO
Chattering in the power
supply contactor when the
power is turned ON?
YES
Replace the contactor
or add a timer in the
sequence circuit for
prevention of chattering.
NO
Is this protective function
activated when the power is
turned OFF?
YES
NO
Any remarkable
waveform distortion in
the source voltage
waveform?
NO
YES
Converter failure or
malfunction caused by
noise is probable.
Contact FUJI.
7-9
Change the sequence
so that inductive loads
are disconnected before
the power is turned
OFF.
Change to another
power supply system.
(11) Keypad communications error (Er2)
Keypad communication error
Er2
Are the keypad
connectors and
sockets inserted
securely?
NO
Correct faults.
YES
Turn the power OFF temporarily.
After the charge lamp goes OFF,
turn the power ON again.
YES
Is correct data displayed on
the keypad?
NO
The converter is normal.
Continue operation.
However, if this error
occurs frequently,
converter failure is
probable. Contact FUJI.
Converter failure.
Contact FUJI.
(12) External alarm (OH2)
External alarm
OH2
Is the alarm signal line of an
external device connected to
the THR-assigned digital input
terminal (X terminal)?
NO
Connect an alarm signal
contact.
If the terminal is left
unconnected, change
the definition of the
digital input (X terminal).
YES
Is the alarm function of
the connected external
device activated?
YES
Remove the cause that
activates the alarm
function from the
external device.
(Ex. AC fuse blown )
NO
Does the definition of the
alarm signal issued by an
external device match the
definition specified by E14
(Normally open/normally
closed)?
NO
YES
Converter failure or
malfunction caused by
noise is probable.
Contact FUJI.
7-10
Change the "normally
open/normally closed"
definition.
(13) Charging circuit error (PbF)
This function is enabled only when 73ANS (73 answerback) is selected using the X1 function.
Charging circuit error
PbF
Is the the output signals of charging
circuit or auxiliary contact of the
magnetic contactor for bypassing
the charging circuit connected to
the 73ANS-assigned digital input (X
terminal)?
NO
Connect the auxiliary contact to
the digital input. Or if the terminal
is left unconnected, change the
definition of the digital input (X
terminal).
YES
Does the auxiliary contact of the
charging circuit magnetic contactor
function within 0.5 sec. after the
charging circuit control output 73A
signal is issued.
*For 280 kW or above capacities:
the auxiliary contact of magnetic
contactor for power supply should
be connected.
NO
Check the sequence circuit of the
charging circuit magnetic
contactor.
YES
Converter failure or
malfunction caused by
noise is probable.
Contact FUJI.
(14) AC input current error (ACE)
AC input current error
ACE
Is there a short circuit or
grounding fault in wiring or
devices in the AC or C
circuit?
YES
Correct the short circuit or
grounding fault.
NO
Was there a momentary
power failure?
YES
Reset and restart operation.
Or select the "Restart mode
after momentary power
failure" (F02 = 1).
NO
Has the load exceeded the
current limit level (H15 to
H18)?
YES
NO
Contact FUJI.
7-11
Increase the current limit
level. Or reduce the load or
select a converter having a
larger capacity.
(15) Other errors
The following alarms are related with options. For details, refer to the description of each option.
Er4: Network device error
This error could occur when the communications option (RS-485, T-Link, SX Bus, or CC-Link) is used.
Erb: Optical network error
This error could occur when the high-speed serial card (OPC-VG7-SI or OPC-VG7-SIR) is used.
Er6: Operation procedure error
This error could occur when option cards are mounted in the wrong way (e.g., mounting options not allowed
for use in combination) or a hardware station number of the high-speed serial card (OPC-VG7-SI, SIR) is
wrongly set.
7-12
7.4 Converter Cannot Get Ready to Run
Upon receipt of a RUN command, the converter outputs the RDY signal ("Converter ready to run") that acts also as
an inverter's run condition.
This section provides the troubleshooting procedure to apply when no RDY signal is issued even after the receipt of a
RUN command.
No output of RDY signal
Is the charge lamp
(CHARGE) lit and does
the keypad display
something?
NO
YES
Remove the cause of the
alarm, reset the alarm
state, and run the
converter
YES
Are the power supply
circuit breaker and
magnetic contactor turned
ON?
Is the voltage at the
power supply terminals
(L1/R, L2/S and L3/T)
normal?
Alarm trip?
YES
Enter a RUN command.
Is a RUN command
entered?
Converter failure is
probable. Contact FUJI.
YES
Perform correct wiring to
R1, S1 and T1.
NO
Are synchronous power
supply input terminals
(R1, S1 and T1) wired?
YES
Perform correct wiring to
R1, S1 and T1.
YES
Does "2222" persist on
the LED monitor?
NO
Perform correct wiring.
NO
Is the wiring as specified
in the basic connection
diagram? Is the phase
order correct?
YES
Examine the sequence
circuit.
NO
Is the magnetic contactor
for the charging resistor
and the power supply
turned ON with the
charging circuit control
output 73A signal?
YES
Perform correct wiring
and apply adequate
peripheral devices.
NO
Turn the power ON.
YES
NO
NO
NO
Are recommended filter
stack model, reactor
model and cable size
used?
YES
Converter failure is
probable. Contact us.
7-13
NO
Check for voltage drop,
phase loss, poor
connection, poor
continuity and other
faults and take corrective
measure.
8 Maintenance and Inspection
Perform daily and periodic inspections to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation of the converter for a long time.
When performing inspections, follow the instructions given in this chapter
• Before proceeding to the maintenance/inspection, turn the power OFF and make sure that the charging lamp
(CHARGE) is turned OFF. Further, make sure that the DC voltage across the terminals P(+) and N(-) and the
terminal voltage of the filtering capacitor have dropped to the safe level (+25 VDC or below).
Otherwise, an electric shock could occur.
• Maintenance, inspection, and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons.
• Take off the watch, rings and other metallic objects before starting work.
• Use insulated tools.
Otherwise, an electric shock or injuries could occur.
• Never attempt to modify the product.
Electric shock or injury could occur.
Reference: Necessary tools
• Phillips screwdrivers Nos. 2 and 3 (for M5 and M6)
• Ratchet wrench and sockets (10, 13, 17, and 19 mm)
and extension bar (150 mm desirable)
• Nippers and small pliers (required for correction of external wiring)
8.1
Daily Inspection
Visually inspect the converter for operation errors from the outside without removing the covers when the converter
is running or the power is ON, as listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
Check that the expected performance (satisfying the standard specifications) is obtained.
Check that the surrounding environment satisfies the standard requirements.
Check that the monitors and indicators on the keypad are normal.
Check for abnormal noise, odor or excessive vibration.
Check for traces of overheat, discoloration and other defects.
8-1
8.2 Periodic Inspection
Before performing periodic inspection, be sure to stop the operation, shut down the power, and remove the front
cover. According to the items listed in Table 8.2-1, perform periodic inspection including points that cannot be
inspected when the power is ON.
After turning the power OFF, make sure that the charging lamp (CHARGE) is turned OFF and the DC voltage across
the terminals P(+) and N(-)and the filtering capacitor has dropped to the safe level (+25 VDC or below) using a
multimeter or the like. This is because even if the power is shut down, the smoothing capacitors remain charged and
require time to be discharged.
Table 8.2-1
Check point
Environment
Voltage
Monitor
displays
Frame, covers
and other
structural parts
List of Periodic Inspections
Check item
1) Check the ambient temperature,
humidity, vibration, and atmosphere
(dust, gas, oil mist, or water drops).
2) Check that tools or other foreign
materials or dangerous objects are not
left around the equipment.
Check that the AC and DC circuit
voltages are correct.
1) Check that the display is clear.
2) Check that there is no missing part in
the displayed characters.
Check for:
1) Abnormal noise or excessive vibration
2) Loose bolts (at clamp sections).
3) Deformation and breakage
4) Discoloration caused by overheat
5) Contamination and accumulation of
dust or dirt
Main circuit
Common
1) Check that bolts and screws are tight
and not missing.
2) Check the devices and insulators for
deformation, cracks, breakage and
discoloration caused by overheat or
deterioration.
3) Check for contamination or
accumulation of dust or dirt.
Conductors 1) Check conductors for discoloration
and wires
and distortion caused by overheat.
2) Check the sheath of the wires for
cracks and discoloration.
Terminal
Check that the terminal blocks are not
blocks
damaged.
DC link bus 1) Check for electrolyte leakage,
capacitor
discoloration, cracks, and swelling of
(Smoothing
the casing.
capacitor)
2) Check that the safety valve does not
protrude or extend remarkably.
Resistors
1) Check for abnormal odor or cracks in
insulators caused by overheat.
2) Check for wire breakage.
Transformer
and reactor
Magnetic
contactor
and relay
Check for abnormal roaring noise and
odor.
1) Check for chatters during operation.
2) Check that the contact surface is not
rough.
How to inspect
Evaluation criteria
1) Check visually or
1) The standard specifications
measure using apparatus.
must be satisfied.
2) Visual inspection
2) No foreign or dangerous
objects are left.
Measure the voltages using
a multimeter or the like.
1), 2)
Visual inspection
The standard specifications
must be satisfied.
1), 2)
The display can be read
and there is no fault.
1) Visual and auditory
inspection
2) Retighten.
3), 4), 5)
Visual inspection
1), 2), 3), 4), 5)
No abnormalities
1) Retighten
1), 2), 3)
No abnormalities
Note: Discoloration of bus
bars, if caused, is regarded as
normal in the characteristics.
2), 3)
Visual inspection
1), 2)
Visual inspection
1), 2)
No abnormalities
Visual inspection
No abnormalities
1), 2)
Visual inspection
1), 2)
No abnormalities
1) Olfactory and visual
inspection
2) Check the wires visually,
or disconnect either wire
and measure the
conductivity with a
multimeter.
Auditory, visual, and
olfactory inspection
1) Auditory inspection
2) Visual inspection
1) No abnormalities
8-2
2) Within about ±10% of the
indicated resistance
No abnormalities
1), 2)
No abnormalities
Control circuit
Inspection point
Inspection item
Printed
1) Check for loose screws and
circuit board
connectors.
and
2) Check for odor and discoloration.
connectors
3) Check for cracks, breakage,
deformation and remarkable rust.
4) Check the capacitors for electrolyte
leaks and deformation.
Cooling fans 1) Check for abnormal noise and
excessive vibration.
Cooling system
2) Check for loose bolts.
3) Check for discoloration caused by
overheat.
Ventilation
path
Check the heat sink, intake and exhaust
ports for clogging and foreign materials.
Inspection method
1) Retighten.
Criteria
1), 2), 3), 4)
No abnormalities
2) Olfactory and visual
inspection
3), 4)
Visual inspection
1) Auditory and visual
inspection, or turn
manually (be sure to turn
the power OFF).
2) Retighten.
3) Visual inspection
4) Life judgment based on
maintenance info (See
Note below.)
Visual inspection
1) Smooth rotation
2), 3)
No abnormalities
No abnormalities
Remove dust accumulating on the converter with a vacuum cleaner. If the converter is stained, wipe it off with a
chemically neutral cloth.
Note: Life judgment based on maintenance info
Refer to the maintenance info shown on the converter keypad for the life judgment of the electrolytic capacitors on
the control printed circuit board and that of the cooling fans. Use the info as a guide for the replacement timing.
(1) Life of electrolytic capacitor on the control printed circuit board
The actual capacitance of the capacitor is not measured but the cumulative power-on time of the control power is
displayed. The time counter increases in units of hours and ignores the time shorter than an hour.
The actual life of the electrolytic capacitor depends largely on the temperature. Use the data merely as a guide.
(2) Life of cooling fan
The cumulative run time of the cooling fan is displayed. The time counter increases in units of hours and ignores the
time shorter than an hour.
The actual life of the fan depends largely on the temperature. Use the data merely as a guide.
Table 8.2-2
Life Judgment Based on Maintenance Info
Parts
Judgment level
Electrolytic capacitor on control printed circuit board
87,600 hours
Cooling fan
87,600 hours *1
*1 Life expectancy of the cooling fan at an ambient converter temperature of 30°C
8-3
8.3 Measurement of Electrical Quantity in Main Circuit
Because the voltage and current of the main circuit power supply (input) and DC output of the converter contain
harmonic components, the readings may vary with the type of the meter. Use meters specified in Table 8.3-1 when
measuring with meters for commercial frequencies. For measurement at the inverter side, refer to the inverter
instruction manual.
The power factor cannot be measured by a commercially available power-factor meter that measures the phase
difference between the voltage and current. To obtain the power factor, measure the power, voltage and current on
each of the input and output sides and use the following formula.
Power factor =
Electric power(W)
x 100(%]
Ҁ3 x Voltage(V) x Current(A)
Table 8.3-1
Meters for Measurement of Main Circuit
DC link bus voltage
(Between P(+) and N(-))
Input (power supply) side
Voltage
Item
Current
Name of meter
Ammeter
AR, S, T
Voltmeter
VR, S, T
Wattmeter
WR, S, T
DC voltmeter
V
Type of meter
Moving iron type
Rectifier or
moving iron type
Digital AC power meter
Moving coil type
Symbol of meter
-
Note: Because the waveform at the input terminals (L1/R, L2/S and L3/T) of the converter is under PWM, measurement
with a multimeter or the like causes large measurement errors. To measure the input voltage, measure at the point shown in
Figure 8.3-1.
Converter
R0
Inverter
P(+)
F
AR
AS
AT
VR VT
WR
L1/R
+
WT
U
V
W
V
L2/S
VS
P(+)
-
L3/T
E(G)
Figure 8.3-1
N(-)
Connection of Meters
8-4
N(-)
E(G)
M
8.4 Insulation Test
Since the converter has undergone an insulation test before shipment, avoid making a Megger test at the
customer's site. If a Megger test is unavoidable for the main circuit, observe the following instructions; otherwise,
the converter may be damaged.
A withstand voltage test may also damage the converter if the test procedure is wrong. When the withstand
voltage test is necessary, consult your Fuji Electric representative.
Breakage may result.
Terminals of power supply circuit
P
(+)
E(G)
N
(-)
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
R1 S1 T1 R0 T0 R2 T2 R3 T3
-
+
Megger
Figure 8.4-1
Megger Test
(1) Megger test of main circuit
a) Use a 500 VDC Megger and shut off the main power supply without fail before measurement.
b) If the test voltage leaks to the control circuit due to the wiring, disconnect all the wiring from the control circuit.
c) Connect the main circuit terminals with a common line as shown in Figure 8.4-1.
d) The Megger test must be limited to across the common line of the main circuit and the ground (G).
e) Value of 5 M: or more displayed on the Megger indicates a correct state. (The value is measured on a converter
alone.)
(2) Insulation test of control circuit
Do not make a Megger test or withstand voltage test for the control circuit. Use a high resistance range tester for the
control circuit.
a) Disconnect all the external wiring from the control circuit terminals.
b) Perform a continuity test to the ground. One M: or a larger measurement indicates a correct state.
(3) Insulation test of external main circuit and sequence control circuit
Disconnect all the wiring connected to the converter so that the test voltage is not applied to the converter.
8-5
8.5 Replacement Parts
Each part of the converter has its own service life that will vary according to the environmental and operating
conditions. It is recommended that the following parts be replaced at the intervals specified in Table 8.5-1.
When the replacement is necessary, consult your Fuji Electric representative.
Table 8.5-1
Part name
Standard Replacement Intervals
Standard replacement intervals
Replacement
Cooling fan
10 years
Replace with a new part.
DC link bus capacitor
(Smoothing capacitor)
10 years
Replace with a new part.
(To be determined according to investigation.)
Electrolytic capacitor on
printed circuit board
10 years
Replace with a new board.
(To be determined according to investigation.)
Fuse
10 years
Replace with a new part.
Other parts
-
To be determined according to investigation.
Notes
- These replacement intervals are based on the converter service life estimated at an ambient temperature of 30qC at
100% (HD mode) or 80% (LD mode) of full load. In environments with an ambient temperature above 30qC or a large
amount of dust or dirt, the replacement intervals may be shorter.
- Standard replacement intervals mentioned above are only a guide for replacement, not a guaranteed service life
8.6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee
(1) When making an inquiry
Upon breakage of the product, uncertainties, failure or inquiries, inform your Fuji Electric representative of the
following information.
a) Converter type
b) SER. No. (Serial number)
c) Date of purchase
d) Inquiries (For example, point and extent of breakage, uncertainties, failure phenomena, and other circumstances)
(2) Product warranty
The product warranty period is ''1 year from the date of purchase'' or 12 months from the manufacturing week
imprinted on the name plate, whichever date is earlier
Note that in any of the following cases, repair shall be charged even in the warranty period.
a) The breakdown was caused by inappropriate use, modifications, repairs or disassembly.
b) The breakdown was caused by out-of-specification use.
c) The breakdown was caused by drop after purchase, or damage or breakage during transportation.
d) The breakdown was caused by an earthquake, fire, flood or wind, lightning, excessive source voltage, or other
natural disaster or secondary accident.
8-6
9
Control Options
9.1 Common Specifications
9.1.1
Option list
Division
Analog card
Digital card
(compatible with
8-bit bus)
Name
Aio expansion card
Model
OPC-VG7-AIO
Dio expansion card
OPC-VG7-DIO
T-Link interface card
CC-Link interface card
OPC-VG7-TL
OPC-VG7-CCL
OPC-VG7-SI
High-speed serial card
OPC-VG7-SIR
Digital card
(compatible with
16-bit bus)
SX bus interface card
OPC-VG7-SX
Specifications
Expansion card for additional two Ao points
With DIOA setting
Expansion card for additional eight Do points
T-Link interface card
CC-Link interface card
For driving converters connected in parallel.
Max. 6 multiplex (when AC power source is
insulated)
For driving converters connected in parallel.
Max. 3 multiplex (when AC power source is not
insulated)
SX bus interface card
All option cards are available with no constraints of the ROM version of the converter unit.
Availability of combination of card configuration
Division
Analog card
Digital card (compatible with 8-bit bus)
Digital card (compatible with 16-bit bus)
Field bus interface unit
9.1.2
Max. pieces that can be mounted
1 analog + 1 digital cards or 2 digital cards
1
1
Acceptance inspection
• Do not use a damaged part or a product with a missing part.
Injury or damage may result.
After the product is delivered, check the following items.
(a) Check if the delivered the product is what you ordered. Check the model printed on the option.
Example of model: OPC-VG7-TL
Name of option: TL o T-Link interface
(b) Check if the delivered item is free from transportation damage.
(c) Check if all accessories are included.
9-1
Accessories
Model of option
Screws and
spacers
OPC-VG7-AIO
OPC-VG7-DIO
Screw (M3): 3
Spacer:
3
Power supply
harness
For ±15V
(Connection at
CN12)
For ±24V
(Connection at
CN24)
OPC-VG7-TL
OPC-VG7-CCL
9.1.3
Plug and housing
-
-
Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.
Plug:
10130-30000VE
Housing: 10336-52F0-008
Plastic optical cable 5 m,
1 piece/1 board
OPC-VG7-SI, SIR
OPC-VG7-SX
Optical cable
-
-
Screw (M3): 1
Spacer:
6
Installing a built-in option (OPC-VG7)
• Do not perform inappropriate work when installing or removing the product.
Breakage may result.
• Before installing or removing the option, turn the power supply of the converter off and wait until the
CHARGE lamp is unlit. Even when the main circuit, control power and auxiliary power of the converter are
turned off (to open these circuits), control terminals 30A, 30B, 30C, Y5A and Y5C of the converter may be
powered by an external power supply.
Electric shock may result.
(1) Removing the front cover
Loosen the front cover mounting screws and remove the front cover.
When removing the front cover from the PWM converter, slide the blanking cover beneath the keypad down
beforehand as shown in the lower right figures.
Loosen the screws on the
blanking cover beneath
the keypad.
Front cover
Slide the blanking cover
down.
Figure 9.1-1
Removal of the Front Cover
9-2
(2) How to install the communication option
There are the following limitations for the installation of the corresponding communication option.
Ƈ Install the communication option card in either of two installation positions (CN2 on the
left side or CN3 on the right side) on the control board while referring to "(a) Installation
Method 1-1" described below. However, if an analog card (OPC-VG7-AIO) is installed on
the same control board, be sure to install the communication option card at CN2 and
install the analog card at CN3.
Applicable options
OPC-VG7-TL
OPC-VG7-SI, SIR
OPC-VG7-CCL
Ƈ To install the communication option card together with OPC-VG7-SX, install at either
installation position (CN2 on the left side or CN3 on the right side) on the control board
while referring to "(b) Installation Method 1-2." The following options cannot be installed
on the same card: TL and SX, or CCL and SX.
(a) Installation method 1-1 (When OPC-VG7-SX is not installed simultaneously)
(Installation at CN3 on right side)
(Installation at CN2 on left side)
1)
Install three spacers g, which come with the option,
to the option installation fittings (a, b and c) on the
control board.
1)
Install three spacers g, which come with the option,
to the option installation fittings (d, e and f) on the
control board.
2)
Install the option so that the connector of the option
(CN1; located on the back side) fits the connector
(CN2) on the control board.
2)
Install the option so that the connector (CN1;
located on the back side) of the option fits the
connector (CN3) on the control board.
3)
Tighten three accessory screws h at the installation
holes of the option to fix the option.
3)
Tighten three accessory screws h at the installation
holes of the option to fix the option.
4)
While referring to Figure 9.1-1 "Removal of the
Front Cover," reverse the removal procedure to
install the front cover.
4)
While referring to Figure 9.1-1 "Removal of the
Front Cover," reverse the removal procedure to
install the front cover.
h
h
Option
g
g
CN2
f
a
CN3
b
c
Figure 9.1-2
Control board
How to install the communication
option (Installation at CN2)
Figure 9.1-3
9-3
d
e
How to install the communication
option (Installation at CN3)
(b) Installation method 1-2 (When OPC-VG7-SX is installed simultaneously)
Spacer attached to
communication option
11.4
13.0
• Dimensions of the spacers that come with the communication option are slightly different from those of the
spacers included in accessories of OPC-VG7-SX. Use them differently according to the procedure described
below.
Incorrect use will cause breakage of products.
Spacer attached to
OPC-VG7-SX
Unit: mm
1)
Install OPC-VG7-SX so that it fits the connector (CN10) on the control board.
2)
Install and fix six spacers h and an M3 screw i, which come with OPC-VG7-SX, to the installation holes (a, b, c,
d, e and f) of OPC-VG7-SX.
3)
Install the option so that the connector (CN1; located on the back side) of the option fits the connector (CN3) on
the control board.
4)
Tighten three accessory screws j to the installation holes of the option to fix the product.
5)
While referring to Figure 9.1-1 "Removal of the Front Cover," reverse the procedure to install the front cover.
j
Option
h
OPC-VG7-SX
a
i
c
b
f
d
CN3
e
CN10
Control board
Figure 9.1-4
How to install the communication option
9-4
(3) Installing the analog option
There are the following limitations in the installation of the following analog option.
Applicable option
OPC-VG7-AIO
Analog option (OPC-VG7-AIO)
Ƈ Install the analog option on the right side (at CN3) without fail among two installation
positions provided on the control board, while referring to "(a) Installation Method 2-1"
described below. If the digital option card or a communication card is installed together, be
sure to install the digital option card (or communication card) on the left side (at CN2).
Ƈ To install the analog option simultaneously with OPC-VG7-SX, install the analog option
on the right side (at CN3) among two installation positions provided on the control board
while referring to "(b) Installation Method 2-2."
(a) Installation method 2-1 (When OPC-VG7-SX is not installed simultaneously)
1)
Install three spacers g, which come with the option, to the option installation fittings (d, e and f) on the control
board.
2)
Install the option so that the connector of the option (CN1; located on the back side) fits the connector (CN3) on
the control board.
3)
Tighten three accessory screws h to the installation holes of the option to fix the option.
4)
Connect the accessory power supply harness at CN2 of the option and CN12 of the control board.
5)
While referring to Figure 9.1-1 "Removal of the Front Cover," reverse the removal procedure to install the front
cover.
h
Option
Power supply harness
CN2
g
f
CN12
Control board
CN3
d
Figure 9.1-5
e
How to install the analog option
9-5
(b) Installation method 2-2 (When OPC-VG7-SX is installed simultaneously)
11.4
13.0
• Dimensions of the spacers that come with the communication option are slightly different from those of the
spacers included in accessories of OPC-VG7-SX. Use them differently according to the procedure described
below.
Incorrect use will cause breakage of products.
Spacer attached to
analog option
Spacer attached to
OPC-VG7-SX
Unit: mm
1)
Install OPC-VG7-SX so that it fits the connector (CN10) on the control board.
2)
Install six spacers h and an M3 screw, which come with OPC-VG7-SX, to the installation holes (a, b, c, d, e and
f) of OPC-VG7-SX.
3)
Install the option so that the connector (CN1) of the option fits the connector (CN3) on the control board.
4)
Tighten three accessory screws j at the installation holes of the option to fix the product.
5)
Connect the accessory power supply harness at CN2 of the option and CN12 of the control board.
6)
While referring to Figure 9.1-1 "Removal of the Front Cover," reverse the removal procedure to install the front
cover.
j
Option
Power supply harness
CN2
h
k
a
c
b
i
h
f
d
CN3
e
CN12
CN10
Control board
Figure 9.1-6
How to install the analog option
9-6
(4) How to install the digital option
There are the following limitations in the installation of the following digital option.
Ƈ Install the digital option at either installation position (CN2) on the left side or CN3 on the
right side) among two installation positions provided on the control board, while referring
to "(a) Installation Method 3-1." However, if the analog option (OPC-VG7-AIO) is
installed on the same control board, be sure to install the digital option at CN2 while
installing the analog option at CN3.
Applicable option
OPC-VG7-DIO
Ƈ To install the digital option together with OPC-VG7-SX, install the digital option at either
installation position (CN2 on the left side or CN3 on the right side) among two installation
positions provided on the control board, while referring to "(b) Installation Method 3-2."
(a) Installation method 3-1 (When OPC-VG7-SX is not installed simultaneously)
(Installation at CN2 on left side)
(Installation at CN3 on right side)
1)
Install three spacers g, which come with the option,
to the option installation fittings (a, b and c) on the
control board.
1)
Install three spacers g, which come with the option,
to the option installation fittings (d, e and f) on the
control board.
2)
Install the option so that the connector (CN1;
located on the back side) of the option fits the
connector (CN2) of the control board.
2)
Install the option so that the connector (CN1;
located on the back side) of the option fits the
connector (CN3) of the control board.
3)
Connect the power supply harness of the option to
CN24 on the control board.
3)
Connect the power supply harness of the option to
CN24 on the control board.
4)
Tighten three accessory screws h at the installation
holes of the option to fix the option.
4)
Tighten three accessory screws h to the installation
holes of the option to fix the option.
5)
While referring to Figure 9.1-1 "Removal of the
Front Cover," reverse the removal procedure to
install the front cover.
5)
While referring to Figure 9.1-1 "Removal of the
Front Cover," reverse the removal procedure to
install the front cover.
h
h
Option
Power
supply
harness
Power supply
harness
g
g
CN2
a
Figure 9.1-7
f
CN3
b
c
Control board
e
CN24
CN24
How to install the digital option
(Installation at CN2)
Figure 9.1-8
9-7
d
How to install the digital option
(Installation at CN3)
(b) Installation method 3-2 (When installing the option together with OPC-VG7-SX)
Spacer attached to
digital option
11.4
13.0
• Dimensions of the spacers that come with the communication option are slightly different from those of the
spacers included in accessories of OPC-VG7-SX. Use them differently according to the procedure described
below.
Incorrect use will cause breakage of products.
Spacer attached to
OPC-VG7-SX
Unit: mm
1)
Install OPC-VG7-SX so that it fits the connector (CN10) on the control board.
2)
Install and fix six accessory spacers h and an M3 screw i, which come with OPC-VG7-SX, to the installation
holes (a, b, c, d, e and f) of OPC-VG7-SX.
3)
Install the option so that the connector (CN1; located on the back side) of the option fits the connector (CN3) on
the control board.
4)
Connect the power supply harness of the option to CN24 on the control board.
5)
Tighten three accessory screws k to the installation holes of the option to fix the product.
6)
While referring to Figure 9.1-1 "Removal of the Front Cover," reverse the removal procedure to install the front
cover.
k
Option
h
h
OPC-VG7-SX
c
a
i
b d
f
Power supply
harness
CN3
e
CN10
Control board
Figure 9.1-9
CN24
How to install the digital option
9-8
(5) How to install the SX option (OPC-VG7-SX)
Install this option according to the following procedure. To install this option together with another option, refer to
pages describing the corresponding option.
a)
Install the option so that it fits the connector (CN10) on the control board.
b)
Install six spacers and an M3 screw, which come with this option, to the installation holes of the option as
shown in the figure below.
c)
While referring to Figure 9.1-1 "Removal of the Front Cover," reverse the removal procedure to install the front
cover.
Spacer
Modular jack
OPC-VG7-SX
M3 screw
CN10
Control board
Figure 9.1-10
How to install OPC-VG7-SX
9-9
9.2 T-Link Option
9.2.1
Product overview
Use this option to control RHC-D Series from Fuji's programmable logic controller
MICREX-F or MICREX-SX (T-Link module).
Main applications
The following functions are provided with this option.
• Signal input such as RUN, X1 and RST
• Monitoring the operation status
• Running, converter shutoff, power running, regeneration, DC link voltage
establishment, batch failure (alarm), T-Link writing error
• Operation data monitor (Input power, effective input current, effective input voltage,
DC link current, power supply frequency)
• Check of each function code setting
• Referring to or changing each function code
Function codes other than the S code may not be changed through communication.
[Limitations in installation]
Prohibited combination (Operation procedure error)
The T-Link option may not be used together with the CC-Link option. If installation is attempted, operation
procedure error "Er6" is caused.
RHC-D
Empty
OPC-VG7-TL
OPC-VG7-CCL
Note: This section describes merely the outline of each product. For detailed specifications, refer to the separate
operation manual of the corresponding unit.
9-10
9.2.2
Model and specifications
Model
Description of model: OPC-VG7-TL
Name of option: TL o T-Link interface option
Accessories: Spacer 3 pieces
M3 crew 3 pieces
9.2.3
Specifications
• For the settings of the switches (RSW1, 2) on the option, read the following and give correct settings.
Accidents may result.
Hardware specifications
Item
Name
Transmission mode
Baud rate
No. of occupied words for
transmission
Terminals
Rotary switches RSW1, 2
Specifications
T-Link interface option
T-Link slave, I/O transmission
500kbps
Use function code H11 "Transmission Format" to select.
Total 16 words (8W + 8W): 8W for transmission from MICREX to RHC-D,
8W for transmission from RHC-D to MICREX
Total 8 words (4W + 4W): 4W for transmission from MICREX to RHC-D,
4W for transmission from RHC-D to MICREX
TX+, TX-, SD
Address setting, 99W space
4W + 4W: Allows connection of 12 stations.
8W + 8W: Allows connection of 6 stations.
Rotary switches RSW1, 2
Set the station number at rotary switches RSW1 and RSW2 on the option board.
9 0 1
7 8
6
7 8
RSW1
4 5
4 5
9 0 1
2 3
6
2 3
RSW1: Upper order
(tens digit)
RSW2: Lower order
(ones digit)
RSW2
• If two or more units are connected, give each unit a unique
address.
• The factory shipment setting is station number 00 (RSW1: 0.
RSW2: 0).
Software specifications
Item
Data updating cycle
Operation command
Operation
Operation state output
Function code
Option function codes
Protective functions
Specifications
4 ms
Operation command, alarm reset command, X1 command
Running, power running, regeneration, DC link establishment, converter shutoff,
batch alarm signal
The function code assigned to the link number in the function code list can be
referred to.
Function codes other than the S code may not be changed through
communication.
H02, H03, H11
Network error: Er4
* Minor failure: The Er4 alarm can be controlled with H02 and H03.
* Serious failure: Immediate alarm
* Minor failure: Transmission error caused by noise or the like. If noise is not frequent, the Er4 alarm can be controlled
with H02 and H03 to continue operation.
* Serious failure: Failure such as PLC shutoff and hardware failure.
9-11
9.2.4
External view
5
40
3-I3.6
5
CN1
RSW1
RSW2
RSW2
T1 T2
SD
TB1
TBL1
OPC-VG7
-TL
50
3-M3
Description of terminal function
T1
T2
SD
(1) Terminal layout
TerminalTB11
(2) Description of terminals
Terminal symbol
Name
Description
T1
T2
SD
(Shield)
T-Link cable connection terminal
For connection of T-Link cable
9-12
9.2.5
Basic connection diagram
Refer to the installation method for built-in option before conducting wiring or connection work.
• Have connection conducted by professionals. If electric circuits must be touched during connection after
power-on, turn the power supply side circuit breaker off (open) to avoid electric shock.
Electric shock or fire may result.
• Even after the circuit breaker is turned off (to open the circuit), the smoothing capacitors remain charged; wait
until the CHARGE lamp of the converter is unlit and measure the DC voltage of the converter with a
multimeter or the like to check that the voltage has dropped below the safe level.
Electric shock may result.
• Do not use a product having a broken or missing part.
Injury may result.
• Do not perform inappropriate work during installation or removal of the product.
Breakage may result.
Basic connection diagram
The example of basic connection diagram is shown on the next page. Follow the precautions below when
connecting.
[Precautions about connection]
(1) Use the T-Link cable specified below.
• Twisted pair cable made by Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. ... CPEV-SB, ø 0.9 x 1 pair
• Twisted pair cable made by Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. ... KPEV-SB, 0.5mm2 x 1 pair
For the specifications of the above cables, refer to the reference data of MICREX.
(2) Connect a 100 (terminator attached to the P capsule at each of both ends of T-Link.
(3) Connect the T-Link cable to form a single loop as shown in the basic connection diagram. Correct transmission
is impossible with cable branches.
(4) Route the T-Link cable as far away from main circuit wiring of the converter main body and other power cables
as possible (at least 30 cm) to avoid malfunction caused by noise; never route these cables in the same duct.
9-13
Example of basic connection diagram
L1/R
P
Power supply to
inverter
L2/S
L3/T
N
Termination
resistor
RHC-D
MICREX
P capsule
T1
T2
OPC-VG7-TL
Termination
resistor
T1
T2
SD
Station
address 50
Twisted pair cables with shielded
SD
DI capsule
T1
T2
SD
Station address
20
DI capsule
T1
T2
SD
Station address
10
G
9-14
9.2.6
Function codes
• Wrong function code data may cause danger. Check the data again after finishing data entry and writing.
Accidents may result.
Name of parameter
Indication at
Name
keypad
No.
Setting
range
0
1
Operation selection
upon error occurrence
MODE ON ER
H02
(Er4 upon minor
failure)
2
3
H03 Timer interval
H11
TL transmission
format
TIMER LINK
0.00
to
20.00s
4W/8W SEL
0, 1
Description of setting
Immediate forcible stop upon occurrence of minor failure
(Er4 trip: Output shutoff)
After minor failure, operation continues for the timer interval
(upon a communication error, the operation command sent in
the immediately previous session is held). After the timer
interval, forcible stop (Er4 trip: output shutoff)
If communication is restored in the timer interval, the
converter follows the command sent via communication.
However, forcible stop after timer interval.
After occurrence of minor failure, operation continues for the
timer interval (upon minor failure, the operation command
sent in the immediately previous session is held). If the minor
failure is not removed after the timer interval, forcible stop.
If communication is restored in the timer interval, normal
operation continues according to the command sent via
communication.
Even if minor failure occurs, an alarm (Er4) is not developed.
In the minor failure state, the operation command having been
sent in the immediately previous session is held. Upon
restoration of communication, normal operation continues
according to the command sent via communication.
Operation time timer setting for occurrence of minor failure.
Valid if H02 = "1" or "2."
0: Format 1 (Standard format 4W + 4W)
1: Format 2 (8W + 8W)
• The factory shipment settings are: H02 = 3 and H03 = 2.00
• For accessible function codes, refer to the function code list.
9.2.7
Protective operation
Minor failure and serious failure
There are two levels in the failure of the T-Link option: minor and serious.
Upon occurrence of a failure, the converter issues Er4 "Network Error."
Item
Cause
Resetting method
Control of failure
status
Minor failure
Serious failure
Broken communication cable Failure of T-Link option
Noise added to communication
cable
Shutdown of MICREX (PLC) hardware (breakage or fault)
Duplicate address
(Wrong setting of RSW1, 2)
Remove the cause of the alarm (restore communication to
Remove the cause of the
automatically remove) and give a reset command (keypad panel,
failure of the hardware and
[RST] or resetting through communication).
reset the power.
The alarm occurs only when
Momentary Er4 alarm
operation commands are given
through the T-Link.
The alarm can be controlled with
function codes H02 and H03.
9-15
9.3 SX Bus Option
9.3.1
Product overview
This is an interface card (OPC-VG7-SX) for connecting the RHC-D
series with Fuji's MICREX SX Series programmable logic controller
via an SX bus. Using programs of MICREX-SX, you can start
automatic operation, monitor, or change or check function code
settings necessary for operation.
Main applications
The following functions are provided with this option.
• Signal input such as RUN, X1 and RST
• Monitoring the operation status
Running, converter shutoff, power running, regeneration, DC link voltage establishment, batch failure (alarm), SX
writing error
• Operation data monitor (Input power, effective input current, effective input voltage, DC link voltage, power
supply frequency)
• Referring to or changing each function code
Function codes other than the S code may not be changed through communication.
[Limitations in installation]
Prohibited combination (Operation procedure error)
The SX option cannot be installed together with the CC-Link option. As well, no other option card can be connected
to the connector (CN2) for eight-bit bus options on the left side.
If installation is attempted, operation procedure error "Er6" is caused.
Empty
RHC-D
RHC-D
OPC-VG7-SX
OPC-VG7-SX
OPC-VG7-CCL
Option card
Empty
[System Definition]
Choose the following, when you add a module in the programming support tool expert (D300Win).
Module attribute type
Module group type
Outline specification
: Individual type module
: Converter
: RHC-C㸪RHC-C(S) or RHC-C/MONITOR㸪RHC-C(M)
Note: This section describes an outline of each product only. For detailed specifications, refer to the operation
manual of the corresponding unit
9-16
9.3.2
Model and specifications
Model
Description of model: OPC-VG7-SX
Name of option: SX o SX bus interface option
Accessories: Spacer
6 pieces
M3 screw 1 pieces
9.3.3
Specifications
• For the settings of the switches RSW1, 2 on the option, read the following and give correct settings.
Accidents may result.
• Give switch (RSW1 and 2) settings on the option after turning off the converter.
Electric shock may result.
Hardware specifications
Item
Name
Transmission mode
Baud rate
Number of occupied
transmission words
Terminal/bus cable
Rotary switch RSW1, 2
State indication LED (RUN
and ERR)
Specifications
SX bus interface option
SX bus slave, I/O transmission
25 Mbps
Standard format (8 words: 4W + 4W) ... Without T-Link option
Monitoring format (16 words: 4W + 12W) ... With T-Link option
Special IN and OUT cables for SX bus *NP1C-P3 (0.3 m) - NP1C-25 (25 m)
Station number setting; an arbitrary station number ranging from 1 to 238 can be
assigned.
State of own station (run or error) is indicated with an LED.
Rotary switches RSW1, 2
Set the station number, using rotary switches RSW1 and RSW2 on the option board. "RSW1" corresponds to the
upper four bits, and "RSW2" corresponds to lower four bits. Read the setting in a decimal as a station number of the
SX bus.
CDE
AB
7 89
AB
456
456
7 89
RSW1
F0 1
23
F0 1
23
CDE
Example: Station number "194" is C2H. Set "C" at RSW1 and "2" at RSW2.
RSW2
• Keep consistency with the SX bus station number specified in the system definition of
MICREX-SX. Because the address assigned by MICREX-SX is the actual SX bus
station number, the setting of this rotary switch may be different.
• If two or more units are connected, give each unit a unique address.
• The factory shipment setting is station number 00 (RSW1: 0. RSW2: 0).
• The RSW1 and RSW2 settings are recognized upon power-up or resetting of the SX
bus (MICREX-SX).
9-17
Software specifications
Item
Specifications
Data updating cycle
Operation command
Operation Operation state
output
Minimum 1 ms
Operation command, alarm reset command, X1 command
Running, power running, regeneration, batch alarm signal, etc.
Function code
Option function codes
Protective functions
The function codes assigned to the link number in the function code list can be
referred to.
Function codes other than the S code may not be changed through communication.
H02, H03
Network communication error (Er4: Network error)
* Minor failure: The Er4 alarm can be controlled with H02 and H03.
* Serious alarm: Immediate alarm
* Minor failure: Signal noise or the like. If noise is not frequent, the Er4 alarm can be controlled with H02 and H03 to
continue operation.
* Serious failure: Serious failure such as hardware failure.
Note: The data refreshing period depends on the SX bus cycle of MICREX-SX and the task period of the application
program.
9-18
External view
14
39.5
10
11
7
10
C
15
12
27
27
9.3.4
A
1
38
A
B
C
NO.
DATE
6.6
CN1
10
2
D
150
3
65
72
E
74
15
4
4
OUT
CN2
CN3
M3
M3ࢿࢪ
OPC-VG7-SX
EP-4304C- C
FG
6
16
10.5
screw
FG
5
40
13.64
CN3
51
IN
5
MADE IN JAPAN
37.5
CN1
㸵-ȭ4.0
RSW1
5
RSW2
RSW2
40
6.5
111.5
13.5
Connector CN2, CN3
RUN
ERR
OUT
F0 1
2
78 9
RSW1
F0 1
2
3 45
6
3 45
6
FG
A BCDE
CN3
A BCDE
CN2
OPC-VG7-SX
EP-4304C-C
78 9
IN
RSW2
• Keep the FG terminal unconnected. To prevent intrusion of noise, do not connect a grounding wire to the terminal.
• This printed option board is not equipped with an SX bus cable (special) or terminator connector. Prepare a cable
having the desired length for the distance of bus connection. Connect a terminator connector on one of the
connectors if the board is located at either end of the SX bus.
• The terminator connector is included in accessories of the MICREX-SX CPU module.
9-19
9.3.5
Basic connection diagram
• Have connection conducted by professionals. If electric circuits must be touched during connection after
power-on, turn the power supply side circuit breaker off (open) to avoid electric shock.
Electric shock or fire may result.
• Even after the circuit breaker is turned off (to open the circuit), the smoothing capacitors remain charged; wait
until the CHARGE lamp of the converter is unlit and measure the DC voltage of the converter with a
multimeter or the like to check that the voltage has dropped below the safe level.
• Because the power of the SX bus is supplied from the power module of the PLC, check that MICREX-SX and
the converter are turned off before installing or removing this option.
Electric shock may result.
• Do not use a product having a broken or missing part.
Injury may result.
• Do not perform inappropriate work during installation or removal of the product.
Breakage may result.
The example of basic connection diagram is shown on the next page. Observe the following precautions when
connecting.
[Precautions about connection]
(1) Be sure to use the special cable for the SX bus cable.
Model: NP1C-P3 (cable length 0.3m) to NP1C-25 (cable 25m)
For the cable specifications, refer to the reference data of MICREX-SX.
(2) Check that MICREX-SX and the converter are turned off before starting work.
(3) Connect the terminator plug, which is attached to the MICREX-SX CPU module, at each of both ends of the SX
bus.
(4) Route the SX bus cable as far away (at least 30cm) from the main circuit cables of the converter main body and
other power cables as possible to avoid malfunction caused by noise. Never route them in the same duct.
(5) Connect the SX bus cable from OUT of the base board to IN. With OUT-OUT or IN-IN connection,
communication fails and the system does not function. Route cables so that the bending radius of the cable
becomes larger than 50mm.
9-20
Example of basic connection diagram
SX bus terminator
plug
SX
IN
+
+
+
+
+
+
OUT
SX bus
expansion
cable
RHC-D
Inverter
P
N
IN
OUT
OPC-VG7-SX
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
P(+)
N(-)
E
E
(G)
SX bus
expansion
cable
RHC-D
P
N
IN
OUT
SX bus
terminator plug
OPC-VG7-SX
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
9-21
Inverter
E
E
(G)
The maximum total length of the
SX bus expansion cable is 25 m.
P(+)
N(-)
9.3.6
Function code
• Wrong function code data may cause danger. Check the data again after finishing data entry and writing.
Accidents may result.
No.
Name of parameter
Indication at
Name
keypad
Setting
range
0
1
H02
Operation selection upon
error occurrence
(Er4 upon minor failure)
MODE ON
ER
2
3
H03
Timer interval
TIMER LINK
0.00
to
20.00s
• The factory shipment settings are: H02 = 3 and H03 = 2.00
• For accessible function codes, refer to the function code list.
9-22
Description of setting
Immediate forcible stop upon occurrence of minor
failure
(Er4 trip: Output shutoff)
After minor failure, operation continues for the
timer interval (upon a communication error, the
operation command sent in the immediately
previous session is held). After the timer interval,
forcible stop (Er4 trip: output shutoff)
If communication is restored in the timer interval,
the converter follows the command sent via
communication. However, forcible stop after timer
interval.
After occurrence of minor failure, operation
continues for the timer interval (upon minor
failure, the operation command sent in the
immediately previous session is held). If the minor
failure is not removed after the timer interval,
forcible stop.
If communication is restored in the timer interval,
normal operation continues according to the
command sent via communication.
Even if minor failure occurs, an alarm (Er4) is not
developed. In the minor failure state, the operation
command having been sent in the immediately
previous session is held. Upon restoration of
communication, normal operation continues
according to the command sent via
communication.
Operation time timer setting for occurrence of
minor failure.
Valid if H02 = "1" or "2."
9.3.7
Protective operation
Minor failure and serious failure
There are two levels in the failure of the SX bus option: minor and serious.
Upon occurrence of a failure, the converter issues Er4 "Network Error."
Item
Cause
Resetting method
Control of failure
status
Communication
error code
displayed at
keypad panel
Minor failure
• Communication data error
caused by noise intruding
into communication cable
Serious failure 1
• All masters shutdown
• Failure of option hardware
• Detection of broken wire
• Improperly installed option
• SX bus power shutdown
Remove the cause of the alarm (restore communication to
automatically remove) and give a reset command (keypad panel,
[RST] or resetting through communication).
Alarm detection is performed
only while operation
commands are given through
the SX bus.
Serious failure 2
After removing the cause of
the alarm, turn the converter
off then on again.
Er4 alarm is caused immediately upon a serious failure.
The alarm can be controlled,
using function codes H02 and
H03.
1
2
3
Note: In serious failure category 1, the CPU must be reset, too, according to some states of the CPU of the
MICREX-SX.
The communication error code in a minor or serious failure can be checked on the communication state screen in
maintenance data at the keypad panel. To reach the communication state screen, press the PRG key on the operation
mode screen to call up the menu screen, use the ҍ or Ҏ key to move the arrow on the left end of the screen to "5.
Maintenance," and press the FUNC/DATA key. Next, press the Ҏ key three times to display the screen shown
below.
㸮
NRK =xxxxx
NRR =xxxxx xx
NRO =xxxxx xx
NRL =xxxxx xx
-: No error
1: Minor failure
2: Serious failure 1
3: Serious failure 2
9-23
9.4 CC-Link Option
9.4.1
Product overview
Use this option to control the RHC-D via the CC-Link from the CC-Link master
(CC-Link compliant sequencer).
Main applications
The following functions are provided with this option.
• Signal input such as RUN, X1 and RST
• Monitoring the operation status
Running, converter shutoff, power running, regeneration, DC link voltage
establishment, batch failure (alarm), CC-Link writing error
• Operation data monitor (Input power, effective input current, effective input voltage,
DC link voltage, power supply frequency)
• Referring to or changing each function code
Function codes other than the S code may not be changed through communication.
[Limitations in installation]
Prohibited combination (Operation procedure error)
The CC-Link option cannot be installed together with the T-Link option card or SX bus interface card. If installation
is attempted, operation procedure error "Er6" is caused.
RHC-D
RHC-D
OPC-VG7-SX
OPC-VG7-TL
OPC-VG7-CCL
OPC-VG7-CCL
Note: This section describes merely the outline of each product. For detailed specifications, refer to the separate
operation manual of the corresponding unit.
9-24
9.4.2
Model and specifications
Model
Description of model OPC-VG7-CCL
Name of option: CCL o CC-Link interface option
Accessories: Spacer
3 pieces
M3 screw 3 pieces
9.4.3
Specifications
• For the settings of the switches (RSW1, 2, 3) on the option read the following and give correct settings.
Accidents may result.
• Turn the inverter off before setting the switches (RSW1, 2, 3) on the option.
Electric shock may result.
Hardware specifications
Item
Name
Station type
No. of connected stations
No. of occupied stations
Connection terminal block
Connection cable
Specifications
CC-Link interface option
Remote device station
Max. 42 stations; various models can be connected.
Fixed to occupy one station (standard profile). Set "0" at H11.
5 terminal blocks (M3 x 5 screws)
Special cable for CC-Link compatible with CC-Link Ver. 1.10
For details, refer to the catalog of CC-Link or web home page of CC-LINK organization
(http://www.cc-link.org/).
Station number setting. An arbitrary station number between "1" and "64" can be
assigned.
Communication speed (baud rate) setting. 10M / 5M / 2.5M / 625K / 156Kbps
L.RUN
Lit upon reception of correct refresh data. Unlit after interruption of certain
interval.
L.ERR
Lit upon communication error of own station. Blinks upon operation of
rotary switch during power-on.
SD
Lit during transmission.
RD
Lit during reception
Rotary switches RSW1, 2
Rotary switch RSW3
Operation state display
LED
Rotary switches RSW 1 and 2
Set the station number of the converter between "1" and "64" before turning the converter on.
9 0 1
4 5
7 8
4 5
9 0 1
2 3
6
2 3
6
7 8
RSW1
RSW2
STATION No.
RSW1: Upper order
(tens digit)
RSW2: Lower order
(ones digit)
• Do not change the station number after the converter is turned on.
Even if the station number is changed during power-on, data
communication cannot be made with the new station number.
• If a duplicate station number is set or the station number is out of
the setting range, correct communication cannot be made. (The
L.ERR LED lights up.)
• Give continuous station number in the order of connection.
(Designate a "reserved station" for the skipped station number.
9-25
Transmission baud rate setting switch RSW3
Before turning on the converter, specify the transmission baud rate in the range from "0" to "4."
Baud rate specifications
4 5
9 0 1
2 3
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5 to 9
6
7 8
RSW3
B.RATE
Baud rate
156 Kbps (Initial value)
625 Kbps
2.5 Mbps
5 Mbps
10 Mbps
Setting error (The L.ERR LED lights up.)
Operation state display LED
The link state of CC-Link can be checked at four LEDs.
Specifications of operation state display LED
State
L.RUN
z
z
z
z
{
{
{
{
z
L.ERR
{
Ì
Ì
{
Ì
Ì
‫ۑ‬
z
Ì
(0.8s period)
Operation
SD
Ì
Ì
{
{
Ì
{
{
{
RD
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z{
Ì
z
Baud rate or station address setting changed in the middle
Before link start
Failure to receive data due to broken wire or the like, shutdown,
hardware reset, occurrence of Er3, failure in power unit
{
{
Ì
z
{
{
{
{
Correct communication
Correct communication with frequent CRC error due to noise
Failure to respond due to CRC error of received data
No data destined to own station
CRC error in refresh reception in spite of response to polling
CRC error in data destined to own station
No data destined to own station or failure to receive data due to noise
Illegal baud rate or station address setting
z: Lit, {, Unlit, Ì: Blink (The LED may erroneously seem to be lit at some transmission speeds.)
Note 1: If the LEDs are lit in a pattern other than those listed above, a hardware error is probable. Contact us.
Software specifications
Opera
tion
Item
Operation command
Operation state output
Option function codes
Protective functions
Specifications
Operation command, alarm reset command, X1 command
Running, power running, regeneration, bit data such as batch alarm signal
H02, H03, H11 (fixed at "0"): Factory shipment setting is "0."
Er4: Network error
* Minor failure: Communication line error (Use function codes H02 and H03 to control
Er4.)
* Serious failure: Option error (The stopping method can be selected with function
codes H02 and H03.)
* Minor failure: If noise is not frequent, the Er4 alarm can be controlled with function codes H02 and H03 to continue
operation.
* Serious failure: Failure such as hardware failure.
9-26
9.4.4
External view
Terminal block
TB1
FG
Specifications of terminal block
SLD
DG
DB
DA
Name of terminal
DA
DB
DG
SLD
FG
Description
For communication data
Remarks
-
For connection of shield of cable SLD and FG are
connected inside the unit.
For grounding
9-27
9.4.5
Basic connection diagram
• Have connection conducted by professionals. If electric circuits must be touched during connection after
power-on, turn the power supply side circuit breaker off (open) to avoid electric shock.
Electric shock or fire may result.
• Even after the circuit breaker is turned off (to open the circuit), the smoothing capacitors remain charged; wait
until the CHARGE lamp of the converter is unlit and measure the DC voltage of the converter with a
multimeter or the like to check that the voltage has dropped below the safe level.
Electric shock may result.
• Do not use a product having a broken or missing part.
Injury may result.
• Do not perform inappropriate work during installation or removal of the product.
Breakage may result.
The basic connection diagram is shown below. Observe the following precautions when connecting.
[Connection precautions]
(1) Use the special cable for CC-Link.
Never use soldered cables; otherwise connections may be disconnected and broken wires may be caused.
(2) Use terminators attached to the programmable logic controller.
(3) For the maximum number of connected stations, refer to the number of connected stations in the hardware
specifications.
To connect one converter
CC-Link master
Converter
Power supply
DA
DB
DG
SLD
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
OPC-VG7-CCL
DA
DB
DG
SLD
FG
9-28
P
N
Inverter
If two or more converters are connected ················ For the allowable number of connected stations, refer to
the hardware specifications.
Termination
resistor
Master
Converter
OPC-VG7-CCL
Converter
OPC-VG7-CCL
DA
DA
DA
DB
DB
DB
DG
DG
DG
SLD
FG
9.4.6
Twisted pair
cables with
shielded
Twisted pair
cables with
shielded
SLD
FG
Termination
resistor
SLD
FG
Protective operation
Minor failure and serious failure
The CC-Link option has two levels in the failure of the CC-Link option: minor and serious. Upon occurrence of a
failure, the converter issues Er4 "Network Error."
Minor failure and serious failure
Item
Cause of occurrence
Resetting method
Control of alarm output
Communication error
code
Minor failure
(Action upon faulty communication line)
• Master shutdown
• Detection of broken wire
• Error in communication data (Noise
intruding to communication cable, etc.)
After removing the cause of the alarm
(automatically removed upon restoration of
communication), give a reset command (Note
1).
• The error is detected only in the CC-Link
operation mode.
• The alarm output method upon detection of
an error can be controlled with function
codes H02 and H03.
01
Serious failure
(Action upon faulty option)
• Option hardware error
• Option installation fault
Turn the converter off and remove the
cause of the alarm, then turn the converter
on.
Momentary Er4 alarm
02
Action upon minor failure (communication line error)
H02
setting
0
1
2
3
Upon communication line error
Communication error after H03 time Upon removal of communication error
Operation
Batch failure Operation
Batch failure Operation
Batch failure
Indication
Indication
Indication
state
output
state
output
state
output
Immediate
Continuation Continuation Continuation
RUN to OFF
Output
ĸ
ĸ
ĸ
Er4 ON
of stoppage
of Er4
of output
Regular
Continuation Continuation Continuation
RUN to OFF
No output
OFF
Er4 ON
Output
display
of stoppage
of Er4
of output
Regular
Regular
RUN to OFF
No output
OFF
Er4 ON
No output
Restart
No output
display
display
Regular
Regular
RUN to OFF
No output
ĸ
ĸ
ĸ
Restart
No output
display
display
9-29
Action upon serious failure (option error)
H02
setting
0
1
2
3
Upon faulty option error
Communication error after H03 time Upon removal of faulty option error
Operation
Batch failure Operation
Batch failure Operation
Batch failure
Indication
Indication
Indication
state
output
state
output
state
output
Immediate
Continuation Continuation Continuation
RUN to OFF
Output
ĸ
ĸ
ĸ
Er4 ON
of stoppage
of Er4
of output
Immediate
Continuation Continuation Continuation
RUN to OFF
Output
ĸ
ĸ
ĸ
Er4 ON
of stoppage
of Er4
of output
Immediate
Continuation Continuation Continuation
RUN to OFF
Output
ĸ
ĸ
ĸ
Er4 ON
of stoppage
of Er4
of output
Immediate
Continuation Continuation Continuation
RUN to OFF
Output
ĸ
ĸ
ĸ
Er4 ON
of stoppage
of Er4
of output
Note 1: "To give a reset command" means to reset the converter in one of the following methods.
* RESET key input at keypad panel
* Give a digital input to error reset [RST] terminal.
* Reset command input via communication
Note 2: Upon minor failure with H02 being "0" or "1," the converter can be reset even if the cause of alarm is not
removed. Upon minor failure with H02 being "2" or upon serious failure, the converter is not reset until the cause
is removed.
Note 3: The communication error code of minor or serious failure can be checked at the keypad on the maintenance data
communication state screen.
9-30
9.5 DIO Option
9.5.1
Outline of product
Use option OPC-VG7-DIO to add maximum eight DO points for each piece.
The digital input is not added.
Major applications
Use switch SW2 provided on the option to switch between DIOA and
DIOB.
Select "DIOA" to use eight DO points. Through this, these points can be
used for the RUN, life forecast, alarm description and other operation state
monitoring signals. They may not be used if "DIOB" is selected.
Photocoupler isolation
The output interface is isolated with photocouplers. The signal cable can be
extended up to several tens of meters.
Sink/source
The output interface can be connected with either the sink or source power supply.
Generally speaking, the sink interface is usually used in Japan and United States.
With this specification, the active signal is indicated with 0V.
The source interface is frequently used in Europe. With this specification, the active signal is indicated with a
positive voltage.
I/O check function
The ON/OFF state of each output signal can be monitored at the keypad panel or through communications (RS485,
T-Link or SX bus).
[Limitation in installation]
Prohibited combination (operation procedure error)
Two DIOA boards may not be installed simultaneously. Or the DIOB setting may not be given to two boards
simultaneously.
If prohibition is neglected, operation procedure error "Er6" will be caused.
RHC-D
Empty
OPC-VG7DIO
(DIOA)
OPC-VG7-DIO
(DIOA)
9-31
9.5.2
Model and specifications
Model
Model nomenclature: OPC-VG7-DIO
Name of option: DIO - digital output option
Accessories: Plug (model: 10136-3000VE, Sumitomo 3M Limited; 36 pins)
Housing (model: 10336-52F0-008, Sumitomo 3M Limited; 36 pins)
Spacer:
3 pieces
Screw (M3): 3 pieces
9.5.3
Specifications
• If the setting of the switch (SW2) provided on the option is wrong, the system fails to function correctly. Read
the following and give a correct setting.
Accidents may result.
Hardware specifications
Output
Item
Name
Model
No. of contacts
Ground
Circuit
Power supply
Specifications
DIO expansion card
OPC-VG7-DIO
8 points (Y11-Y18)
CME; common ground for both points
Circuit isolated with photo-relays (50 mA DC max., 28 V max.)
Capable of sink/source connection (sink/source)
24 V
The power is supplied from the printed circuit board of the main body. Connect the power
supply harness to the connector provided on the main body.
1) Switch on printed circuit board
Refer to the figure to the right for approximate locations of
switches in the view from the front of the printed circuit board.
SW2
DIOB
DIOA
Either the sink or source power supply can be connected to the
output circuit.
Switch
SW1
SW2
Factory shipment state
SINK
DIOA
OPC-VG7-DIO
SOURCE SINK
SW1
EP-4223Connector
9-32
Power supply
harness
2) Output circuit
Either the sink or source power supply can be connected. Because the CME common is common for all contacts
(Y11 to Y18), simultaneous connection of sink and source types is prohibited. To connect a control relay, connect
a surge absorber diode at both ends of the exciting coil as shown in the figure below.
Y11
Y11
CME
Source voltage: 28Vmax
Passing current: 50mAmax
CME
CME is isolated from CM.
Source voltage: 28Vmax
Passing current: 50mAmax
CME is isolated from CM.
3) Others
• If the protective function of the converter is activated, refer to Section 7.3 "Troubleshooting" described for the
converter to remove the cause of the fault and restart.
• For the maintenance and inspection items, refer to Section 8.
Software specifications
Item
Refreshment
Output data
interval
9.5.4
Specifications
Minimum 0.5 ms interval.
Some output functions may be refreshed at an interval longer than 0.5 ms.
Dimensioned drawing
Printed circuit board
9-33
Accessories
Plug
Housing
12.7
3M
10136
14.0
17.0
32.2
18.0
43.5
12.7
39.0
32.2
7.5
9.1
23.8
Pin 1
1.27
Pin 19
21.59
27.8
15°
Model: 10136-3000VE
Specifications: Sumitomo 3M Limited; 36 pins
Model: 10336-52F0-008
Specifications: Sumitomo 3M Limited; 36 pins
* The plug and housing come with the product.
9-34
9.5.5
Basic connection diagram
Basic connection diagram (DIOA)
Table 9.5-1
Pin
No.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19-30
31
32
33
34, 35
36
Name
Function
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y14
Y15
CME
Y16
Y17
Y18
CME
Control output Y11
Control output Y12
Control output Y13
Control output Y14
Control output Y15
Output common
Not connected
Control output Y16
Control output Y17
Control output Y18
Not connected
Output common
Main power supply
3-phase
50/60Hz
[13]
[14]
Y13
[15]
[16]
Y15
[17]
[31]
Y16
Y17
[32]
[33]
Y18
[CME]
[18]
[P24]
[M24]
[P24]
[M24]
23
22
3
2
25
24
5
4
27
26
7
6
29
28
9
8
CN24
E
9-35
31
30
11
10
33
32
13
12
35
34
15
14
36
17
16
<View from soldered terminal side of plug>
P
L3/T
Y14
1
N
L2/S
Y11
21
20
Inverter
L1/R
Y12
19
RHC-D
OPC-VG7-DIO, SW2 = DIOA
Pin
Name
Function
No.
1
CM
Common (M24)
2-5
Not connected
6
CM
Common (M24)
7-12
Not connected
18
9.5.6
Function codes
• Modification of the function code data may cause dangerous state. To be safe, check the data after entering and
writing it.
Accidents may result.
DIOA output
The following functions can be assigned to eight digital outputs (Y11 through Y18).
Give the setting at function codes E06 through E13.
Setting
0
1
Function
Running
Ready
2
Current limiting
3
4
Life forecast
Heat sink overheat
forecast
Overload forecast
Power running
Regenerating
5
6
7
9.5.7
Symbol
[RUN]
[RDY]
Setting
8
9
[IL]
10
[LIFE]
[PRE-OH]
11
12
Function
Current limit forecast
Restart after momentary
power failure
Source frequency
synchronization
Alarm description
Alarm description
[PRE-OL]
[DRV]
[REG]
13
14
Alarm description
Option DO
Symbol
[CUR]
[U-RES]
[SY-HZ]
[AL1]
[AL2]
[AL3]
[OPT-DO]
Check function
(1) Option installation check
You can check whether the DIO option is installed or not, on the keypad panel.
On the operation mode screen, switch to the program menu screen and select "4. I/O
Check." There are total five I/O check monitor screens; use the ҍ or Ҏ key to
scroll the screen to go to the corresponding DIO option screen. In the system with DIOA
setting, the square † on the LCD screen changes to solid black square „ as shown in the
figure to the right.
㸮
„DIOA
†TLINK
†CCL
†FIELD
†AIO
†SI
†SX
†TRACE
As well, the output state screen is displayed for the system equipped with a DIOA option.
(2) I/O check
The digital output state of the DIO option can be checked at the keypad panel of the
converter. On the operation screen, switch to the program menu screen and select "4. I/O
check." There are total five I/O check monitor screens; use the ҍ or Ҏ key to
scroll the screen to go to the corresponding DIO option digital output state screen. The
screen shows the DIO digital output state. The active contact is indicated with a solid
black square „.
* There are some screens not displayed with the system not equipped with the option.
The number of screens is five, including those not displayed.
9-36
㸮
†Y11 †Y15
†Y12 †Y16
†Y13 †Y17
†Y14 †Y18
9.6
9.6.1
AIO Option
Outline of product
The analog output built in the main body of the converter is only one point [A01]. Use
option OPC-VG7-AIO to add two points [A04] and [A05]. Analog inputs are not
added.
Major applications
The same control functions as those of the analog output built in the main body of the
converter become available.
Relieving the shortage in analog output
Use the option to add analog output points.
This expansion card becomes necessary if the analog output terminal built in the main
body of the converter is already used and more analog outputs are necessary.
I/O check function
The analog output signal statuses can be monitored on the I/O check screen of the
keypad panel.
[Limitation in installation]
Available combination
The AIO option can be installed at the right side connector (CN3) when facing the control printed circuit board. Only
one analog option can be installed.
RHC-D
Empty
OPC-VG7-AIO
Empty
9-37
9.6.2
Model and specifications
Model
Model nomenclature: OPC-VG7-AIO
Name of option: AIO; ĺ analog output option
Accessories: Spacers
3 pieces
Screws (M3) 3 pieces
Power supply harness (for r15V power supply) 1 piece
9.6.3
Specifications
• The adjusters (VR1 and VR2) inside the option are adjusted before shipment from the factory. Keep away from
the adjusters.
Accidents may result.
Hardware specifications
Item
Name
Model
Output
No. of terminals
Ground
Circuit
Power supply
Specifications
AIO expansion card
OPC-VG7-AIO
2 points ([AO4], [AO5])
[M] (Connected with terminal [M] in the control printed circuit board)
Output voltage: 0 to r10VDC, resolution: 12 bits
Output impedance: Min.3k:
r15V
Supplied from control printed circuit board. Connect the power supply harness to
CN12.
Software specifications
Item
Output data
Refreshment
interval
Function
assignment
Specifications
1 ms
Can be configured with function codes E19 and E20
9-38
Dimensioned drawing
3-䃥3.6
5
5
2 CN2
1
29
30
CN2
CN1
4
11.5
3
OPC-VG7-AIO EP-4231-
85
CN1
5
3
1
B
A
15.4
125
11.5
VR1 VR2
2
6
1
5
VR2
CN3
AI3
AI4
M TB1M 1 Ao4
5
1
40
9.6.4
CN3
Ao5
6
TB1
10.3
40
50
9-39
9.6.5
Basic connection diagram
• Have connection done by professional personnel. If electric circuits may be touched during connection work
after the power is supplied, turn the main circuit breaker off to avoid electric shock.
Risk of electric shock and fire
• Even if the circuit breaker is turned off, the smoothing capacitor remains charged. Wait until the CHARGE
lamp of the converter is turned off, and check that the DC voltage of the converter has dropped below the safe
voltage, using a multimeter or the like.
Risk of electric shock
• Do not use the product if some parts are damaged or missing.
Risk of injuries
• Do not conduct incorrect work during installation or removal of the product.
Risk of breakage
Main power supply
3-phase
50/60Hz
RHC-D
Inverter
L1/R
P(+)
L2/S
N(-)
Analog output 4
Analog output 5
[AO4]
[AO5]
OPC-VG7-AIO
L3/T
[M]
[CN2]
[CN12]
E(G)
9-40
9.6.6
Function codes
• Modification of the function code data may cause dangerous state. To be safe, check the data after entering and
writing it.
Risk of accidents
• The AIO option state screen is not displayed at the keypad panel if the AIO option is not installed. It is
displayed after the option is installed.
The following functions can be assigned arbitrarily to two analog outputs ([A04] and [A05]).
Use function codes E19 and E20 to assign.
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
9.6.7
Function
Incoming power
Effective input current
Effective input voltage
DC link voltage
Source frequency
+10V output test
-10V output test
Symbol
[PWR]
[I-AC]
[V-AC]
[V-DC]
[FREQ]
[P10]
[N10]
Scale
r200% / r10V
r200% / r10V
250(500)V / 10V
500(1000)V / 10V
100Hz / 10V
-
Check function
(1) Option installation check
You can check whether the AIO option is installed or not, on the keypad panel. On the operation mode screen, switch
to the program menu screen and select "4. I/O Check." There are total five I/O check monitor screens; use the
ҍ or Ҏ key to scroll the screen to go to the corresponding AIO option screen. The square † on the LCD
screen changes to solid black square „ as shown in the figure to the right.
As well, the output state screen is displayed for the system equipped with an AIO option.
(2) I/O check
The analog output state of the AIO option can be checked at the keypad panel of the
converter. On the operation screen, switch to the program menu screen and select "4. I/O
check." There are total five I/O check monitor screens; use the ҍ or Ҏ key to
scroll the screen to go to the corresponding AIO option analog output state screen. The
screen shows the output voltage of [A04] and [A05], [Ai3] and [Ai4] are invalid.
* There are some screens not displayed with the system not equipped with the option.
The number of screens is five, including those not displayed.
9-41
㸮
$L
$L
$2
$2
s[[[9
s[[[9
s[[[9
s[[[9
9.7 SI Option
9.7.1 Product overview
Large-capacity converter drive
The main circuit insulation system parallel system for the RHC-D Series PWM converter is
used in combination with an insulation transformer to insulate the primary power supply, and
connects to multiple units (2 multiplex, 3 multiplex) to drive the converter. This option applies
to load sharing for all converters, and facilitates drive with up to a 6 multiplex system.
Current sharing
To drive an inverter with multiple converters, it is necessary to equip each converter with an
optical link option. With this optical link, current commands allotted to converters are
conveyed instantly. Current is controlled (feedback control) for each converter, enabling
operation with load sharing determined by the drive capabilities of each converter.
Parallel/single system switching function
In cases such as where a single converter malfunctions when performing parallel system drive,
parallel system operation can be canceled and switched to standard single system operation
with the parallel/single system switching function.
[Installation restrictions]
It is not possible to equip converters with two SI options at the same time. By doing so, operation procedure error "Er6"
will occur.
9.7.2
Model
Model: OPC-VG7-SI
2SWLRQQDPH6,ĺ2SWLFDOOLQNRSWLRQIRUSDUDOOHOV\VWHPV
Accessories: Spacer x 3
Screw (M3) x 3
Optic fiber cable x 1 (for transmission/receipt)
9-42
9.7.3
Specifications
Control specifications
Item
Applicable converter
capacity
Parallel control method
Output voltage
Carrier frequency
Input power
Input power factor
Input harmonic current
Dedicated functions
Restart following
momentary power
interruption
Control function
Parallel
system
Hardware settings
settings
Station
address
setting
Code
settings
Parallel
system
Slave qty
setting
Specifications
MD (CT) spec. (up to 4,800kW: 6 multiplex),
LD (VT) spec. (up to 6,000kW: 6 multiplex)
AVR constant control with DC ACR minor
640 - 710 VDC
5kHz
380 - 440 V 50Hz, 380 - 460 V 60Hz * The capacity must be reduced if less than 400 V.
Approx. 0.99 (with 100% load)
The power supply power factor drops to approx. 0.95 when the voltage is 420 V (210 V)
or higher, and when operating with a load of 50% or greater. (regenerative operation
only)
The METI harmonic suppression countermeasure guidelines state that the scale factor Ki
can be 0.
Output is cut following a momentary power interruption, and the converter is restarted
when power is restored.
Slave units have partial functional restrictions.
Sets optional applications.
The parallel system setting is (SW2-1 = ON, SW2-2 = OFF).
Optional hardware switch SW1
SW1=0: master
6:VODYHVWDQGDUGVODYHLVVHWWR"1", and slave 2 is set to "2".
Parallel/single system switching is performed with function code H12 "Parallel system".
0: Parallel system disabled (factory default)
1: Parallel system enabled
When set to function code H12 = "Parallel system enabled", dynamic parallel/single
system switching is possible with digital input signal [OPT-DI].
The number of optically linked slave units is set with function code H13 "No. of parallel
system slave stations". With a two unit parallel system, for example, the number of slaves
will be "1".
Main circuit insulation system parallel system
specifications
The optical link option is applied to multiple
converters, control is synchronized across each
converter, and load current sharing is controlled.
Isolation
transfomer
If using a common connection for the converter
output side DC circuit, an isolation transformer is
required to insulate the main power supply.
One of the features of parallel systems is that they are
compatible with large-capacity loads greater than the
single unit capacity.
If, for example, driving three 200 kW converters in
parallel, converter output equivalent to 600 kW is
possible.
R,S,T
R,S,T
R,S,T
Master
(RHC-4DE)
Slave 1
(RHC-4DE)
Slave 2
(RHC-4DE)
P,N
OPCVG7-SI
P,N
Inverter power supply
9-43
OPCVG7-SI
P,N
OPCVG7-SI
9.7.4
External drawings
5
3-䃥3.6
5
2
1
29
30
CN1
3
11.5
2
OPC-VG7-SI
125
85
EP-4222B-C
4
-
14
15
17
16
5
B
A
15.4
CN2
CN2
SW2
SW1 1 2
5
1 PH1
1
PH2
40
5
PH1
40
10
50
Unit: mm
Optional PCB external dimensions
Set the station address switch to the master-slave setting, and set the function selection switch to the fixed (parallel
system) setting as shown below.
1 2
7 8
4
5 6
9 0 1
2 3
OFF
Station address switch (SW1)
Function selection switch (SW2)
5m
Connector with lock
(Gray)
Optic plastic cable
Plastic optic fiber cable
9-44
Connector with lock
(Blue)
9.7.5
Connection
• Connecting incorrectly may result in disasters such as electric shock or fire. Connection
work should always be carried out by a qualified technician. If contact is made with
electrical circuits when performing connection work after turning on the power, turn off
(open) the power supply breaker to prevent electric shock.
• Smoothing capacitors will still be charged even if the breaker is turned off (opened),
resulting in electric shock if touched. Ensure that the converter charge lamp (CHARGE)
turns off, and use a tester to verify that the converter DC voltage has dropped to a safe
enough level.
• Do not use products with damaged parts or parts missing. Doing so may result in injury
or damage.
• The product may be damaged if incorrectly installed or removed.
(1) Switch settings
• The parallel system will not function normally if the option switch (SW1, SW2) settings
are wrong. Read the following settings carefully and set correctly.
Card switches (SW1)
Part No.
SW1
rotary switch
7 8
5 6
9 0 1
4
SW1
Setting
Function
0
Master
1-5
Slave
1-5
6-9
Disabled
Remarks
Including the main circuit wiring, operating sequences must be the
same as standard products.
Only current control is performed, however, as with the master,
main circuit wiring and wiring for operating sequences and so on
is required.
Do not set as follows.
Operation procedure alarm "Er6" will occur if set as shown on the
left.
Duplicate station address switch setting is not permitted at connected converters. To avoid
mistakes, set the station address with sequential numbers in the order of connection (master 0,
slave 1, slave 2).
2 3
Define units set to SW1=0 as the master, and units set to 6: as slaves.
The SIR card SW1 setting range is 1 to 2.
Card switches (SW2)
Part No.
SW2
DIP switch
1 2
OFF
SW2-1
Setting
OFF
SW2-2
Setting
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Function
Parallel
system
-
Remarks
Do not set.
Fix the settings for all installed optical link
options, regardless of the master and slave.
Do not set.
Fix the actual settings as shown on the left. The switches are normally set as shown when the product
is shipped.
With these settings, the optical link option can be used as a parallel system.
9-45
(2) Optic fiber cable connection
• If the plastic optic fiber cable is bent for long periods of time with curvature of 35 mm or
less, a converter link error (Erb) may occur, resulting in an alarm. If this happens,
converter output will be cut. Always ensure that the optic fiber cable has a curvature of
35 mm or greater.
Connect the OPC-VG7-SI/SIR cards on each converter with the optic fiber cables provided.
Each of the plugs on the end of the optic fiber cables is a different color (blue, gray), and should be connected to the
same corresponding color on each card. Connect the cables to create a complete loop. If, for example, connecting
three units (1, 2, 3), use three FDEOHVWRFUHDWHDORRSLQWKHRUGHUĺĺĺ
Option card optical connectors
Part No.
T-1528
R-2528
Name
TX
RX
Color
Gray
Blue
Overview
Transmitter (optical communication - transmission)
Receiver (optical communication - receipt)
OPC-VG7-SI/SIR
Slave 1
OPC-VG7-SI/SIR
Master
Blue
Gray
(receipt) (transmission)
Blue
Gray
(receipt) (transmission)
SW1
4
5 6
4
7 8
2 3
2 3
Gray
(transmission)
Blue
(receipt)
R-2528 T-1528
9 0 1
9 0 1
9 0 1
R-2528 T-1528
5 6
7 8
R-2528 T-1528
2 3
7 8
5 6
Blue
Gray
(receipt) (transmission)
SW1
SW1
4
OPC-VG7-SI/SIR
Slave 2
Blue
(receipt)
Gray
(transmission)
Blue
(receipt)
Gray
(transmission)
3 unit example
Plastic fiber cable absolute maximum rating
Item
Storage temp. range
Tension
Min.
-40
Short-term bend radius
Long-term bend radius
Tensile strength
(over long periods)
Flexibility
Impact
Guaranteed minimum
distance
Weight
Max.
+75
50
Unit
qC
N
10
-
mm
35
-
mm
-
1
N
-
1000
0.5
Remarks
Within 30 minutes
Operation will cease within 1 hour, and a converter link error (Erb)
will occur.
If bent with curvature of 35 mm or less for long periods, a converter
link error (Erb) may occur. Ensure a curvature of 35 mm or greater.
times 90q bend on 10 mm mandrel (shaft, spindle)
kg
Impact test based on MIL-1678, Mothod2030, Procefurel
20
m
4.6
g/m
Minimum guaranteed value due to transmission loss (0 - 70 qC)
* A Mitsubishi Rayon plastic optic cable (accessory) is used.
9-46
(3) Parallel/single system switching
1) Function overview
Parallel system operation with high-speed serial card (OPC-VG7-SI/SIR) can be canceled and switched to
single system operation for a single unit with external digital input signal [OPT-DI].
This switching function is used as an emergency backup in cases where a malfunction occurs at a converter in a
parallel system, and operation is continued at reduced load capacity with a functional converter only.
The function code for parallel system switching is H12 "Parallel system".
The following diagram illustrates basic connection for parallel system and single system switching.
Optical communication
OPC-VG7-SI/SIR
OPC-VG7-SI/SIR
[OPT-DI]
[RST]
[CM]
(E01=4) X1
X1 (E01=4)
RST
RHC-D
Master
RHC-D
Slave
RST
CM
CM
[OPT-DI]
[RST]
[CM]
DC common
2) Parallel/single system switching specifications
Parallel/single system switching is performed with function code H12 and digital input [OPT-DI]. If the X1
terminal is the normal open setting with function code H12 = 1 "parallel system", [OPT-DI] = ON (closed) will
be the single system (parallel system canceled), and [OPT-DI] = OFF (open) will be the parallel system.
Table 9.7-1
Function Code
H12 "Parallel System"
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
[OPT-DI]
Drive System
OFF
Single
ON
Single
OFF
Parallel
ON
Single
<Precautions>
1. Switching input is disabled during operation, and is not updated until the converter stops.
2. This function is only valid when the system is equipped with a high-speed serial card, and the X1 terminal is
assigned to [OPT-DI].
3. If using this switching function, it is only possible to run a single converter among those that make up the parallel
system. Do not run multiple converters simultaneously with the single system.
4. If using the remaining two systems of a three converter system in parallel system operation when one of the
converters has malfunctioned, it is first necessary to reconfigure the system as a two converter system by making
changes to the optic fiber cable wiring, changing the station address switch settings on the option card, and
resetting the function code.
9-47
(4) Parallel system alarm indication
If an alarm occurs at the master or slave unit when performing parallel system operation, all units switch to alarm
mode simultaneously and stop. At the same time, an alarm code for the 1st alarm cause is displayed on the keypad
LED display area of all units.
The unit at which the alarm occurred can be determined from the displayed alarm code. Even if multiple alarms
occur simultaneously, it is only the 1st alarm cause that is displayed as the cause alarm for other stations.
Furthermore, the alarm history displays normal alarm codes.
OH2.
Dot display
0=OH2
OH2
0=OH2
External alarm
PRG ĺ3URJUDPPHQX
RESET ĺ5HVHW
External alarm
PRG ĺ3URJUDPPHQX
RESET ĺ5HVHW
When alarm occurs at other station
(Alarm trip due to other station cause)
When alarm occurs at local station
(Alarm trip due to local station cause)
(5) Setting the number of connected units
It is necessary to set the number of slave units connected by optic fiber for the function code. This is not the setting
for the number of units including the master.
Number of connected units and function codes
Item
Function code H13
Function
Parallel system
No. of slave stations
H13 Setting
Remarks
1
1 master + 1 slave = 2 unit system setting
2
1 master + 2 slave = 3 unit system setting
3
1 master + 3 slave = 4 unit system setting
4
1 master + 4 slave = 5 unit system setting
5
1 master + 5 slave = 6 unit system setting
The H13 setting range when equipped with SIR card is 1 to 2.
Setting example
When using a 2 unit system
Set to H13=1 for all units.
Master
When using a 3 unit system
Set to H13=2 for all units.
Slave
H13=1
H13=1
Master
Slave 1
Slave 1
H13=2
H13=2
H13=2
If the H13 setting is incorrect, an alarm will occur, and the parallel system will cease to function normally.
Ensure to set correctly.
9-48
9.7.6
Basic connection diagram
The following is a connection example (3 unit system) when performing parallel system operation.
R2,T2
CRX
[RUN]
[X1]
[RST]
[CM]
P,N
R0,T0
R1,S1,T1
R2,T2
[Y5A]
[Y5C]
Ѝ[RDY]
[30A]
[30B]
[30C]
Ѝ[30]
CRX
[X1]
[RST]
[CM]
Main power
Control power
P,N
R0,T0
R2,T2
[30A]
[30B] Ѝ[30]
[30C]
[RUN]
[73A]
[73C]
[RST]
[30A]
[30B] Ѝ[30]
[30C]
[X1]
[CM]
RX TX
[Y5A]
Ѝ[RDY]
[Y5C]
CRX
RHC D-Type
SLAVE 1
RHC D-Type
MASTER
L1/R,L2/S,
L3/T
R1,S1,T1
[Y5A]
Ѝ[RDY]
[Y5C]
[RUN]
[73A]
[73C]
RX TX
SW1=2
SW2-1=ON
SW2-2=OFF
Control power
L1/R,L2/S,
L3/T
OPC-VG7-SI/SIR
R1,S1,T1
Main power
SW1=1
SW2-1=ON
SW2-2=OFF
R0,T0
RX TX
OPC-VG7-SI/SIR
Control power
L1/R,L2/S,
L3/T
SW1=0
SW2-1=ON
SW2-2=OFF
Main power
OPC-VG7-SI/SIR
High-speed communication (1 Mbps), optic fiber
P,N
[73A]
[73C]
RHC D-Type
SLAVE 2
Power supply to inverter
Special instructions:
1. An alarm stoppage condition occurs simultaneously at all units when an alarm occurs (30X
operation), however, the RUN signal should be
opened at all converters in the interests of safety.
MASTER
SLAVE 1
SLAVE 2
30A
30A
30A
30
30C
30
Converter
operation
command
30
30C
Inverter
operation
command
MASTER
Y5A
30C
30X
2. After ensuring that all converter units are ready for
operation [RDY], specify a sequence that issues a
run command to the inverter (ensure that it is the
inverter).
MASTER
bypass
SLAVE 1
bypass
RDY
Y5C
SLAVE 2
bypass
SLAVE 1
Y5A
RDY
Y5C
3. Alarms can be reset simultaneously at all units by
inputting an [RST] signal from any unit. If
switched over to a single system, only the unit to
which the [RST] signal is input is reset.
MASTER
bypass
SLAVE 1
bypass
SLAVE 2
Y5A
RDY
Y5C
30X
4. When using the parallel/single system switching
function, [OPT-DI] is assigned to the X1 contact
input.
CRX
Figure 9.7-1
When switching to a single system, input an
[OPT-DI] signal, bypass alarm circuits for other
than single operation units, and create a sequence
circuit so that a run command is input only to the
single operation unit.
9-49
IRX
SLAVE 2
bypass
9.7.7
Operation
(1) Settings prior to operation
• Certain function codes must be set to the same value for both master and slave units.
Normal operation will not be possible without this setting.
Before starting operation, always ensure that the following function codes are the same for both the master and slave
units. The function codes are set to the same values when the product is shipped, but should be checked again.
Applicable Code
Function
Current rating switching
Overload warning level
Dedicated parallel system codes
F03
E15
H12, H13
Remarks
These must be the same.
These must be the same.
These must be the same.
(2) Turning on the power
• Input a "RUN" operation command to both the master and slaves.
The system will not start up if this command is given only to the master or slave.
• Certain slave unit function code settings are disabled at the keypad display.
• After turning on the control power, it is not possible to start the initial operation for the
first 10 seconds while initial processing is being performed.
If the power is turned on with a run command input, operation starts approximately 10
seconds later.
• If operation is started without the power turning on at even one of the units in a parallel
system, a converter link error (Erb) occurs. This alarm does not occur if operation is not
started.
There is no need to turn on the power for all units simultaneously. Furthermore, there is no particular order in which
the power must be turned on. No alarms are detected unless operation is started, and therefore the power can be
turned on in any order.
Run/stop commands
Run and stop commands are input to both master and slave units. It is necessary to understand that multiple slave
units that are optically linked are simply hardware used to perform current control.
I/O function
The master unit has no restrictions, however, slave units have the following functional restrictions.
Valid slave I/O functions
Digital input
Valid Functions for
Parallel System Slaves
(Items not listed are invalid)
Run/stop command
Error reset
External alarm
73 answer back signal
Option DI
Batch alarm
Terminal Signal
[RUN]
[RST]
[THR]
[73ANS]
[OPT-DI]
[30A, 30B, 30C]
Remarks
Resets all system units.
Performs parallel/single system switching.
Running
[RUN]
Functions with
"Operating information from master",
"Terminal block/communication RUN"
AND information.
Ready
Lifetime warning
Cooling fan overheat warning
[RDY]
[LIFE]
[PRE-OH]
Unit's own lifetime
Digital output
9-50
Digital output
Analog input
Analog output
Valid Functions for
Parallel System Slaves
(Items not listed are invalid)
Overload warning
Driving
Regenerating
Synchronizing power supply
frequency
Terminal Signal
Remarks
[PRE-OL]
[DRV]
[REG]
[SY-HZ]
Outputs with alarm information from master
added.
Alarm details
[AL1 - 3]
Option DO
All invalid
Input power
Input current effective value
Input voltage effective value
[OPT-DO]
[PWR]
[I-AC]
[V-AC]
Intermediate DC voltage
[V-DC]
Power supply frequency
+10, -10 V test
[FREQ]
[P10, N10]
Outputs input power calculated by unit itself.
Outputs voltage and current detected by unit
itself.
Outputs intermediate voltage detected by unit
itself.
Outputs frequency detected by unit itself.
(3) Keypad functions
The keypad functions can be used without restrictions for either the master or slave.
(4) Function codes (F - U)
The master unit can be used without restrictions,
however, slave units have functional restrictions.
Code "1" must be set to the same value for both
the master and slave.
0: Setting invalid
1: Setting valid (code for which same value as master must be
set)
2: Setting valid (code for which no need to set same value as
master)
3: Setting valid (code for which setting unique to parallel system
required)
Slave function codes
Code
Class
Code
Class
Code
Class
Code
Class
Code
Class
Code
Class
Code
Class
F00
2
E01
2
E10
2
E19
2
H01
2
H10
2
H19
0
F01
F02
0
0
E02
E03
2
2
E11
E12
2
2
E20
E21
2
2
H02
H03
2
2
H11
H12
2
3
H20
0
F03
F04
1
2
E04
E05
2
2
E13
E14
2
2
E22
E23
2
2
H04
H05
2
2
H13
H14
3
2
F05
F06
2
2
E06
E07
2
2
E15
E16
1
2
E24
E25
2
2
H06
H07
2
2
H15
H16
0
0
F07
F08
2
0
E08
E09
2
2
E17
E18
2
2
E26
E27
2
2
H08
H09
2
2
H17
H18
0
0
(5) Function codes (S: Command data, M: Monitor)
S codes (command data)
The master unit can use all codes, however, only S01 "Operation" is valid for slave units.
However, section "9.7.7 I/O Function" restrictions apply.
M codes (monitor data)
Both master and slave units can be used without restrictions.
9-51
9.7.8 Protection functions
• When an alarm occurs for some reason at even a single converter unit of a parallel
system comprising two or more units, there will be insufficient capacity even when
continuing operation with the remaining unit(s), resulting in cases where the machine
system is unable to function normally. To eliminate such cases, an instantaneous (within
several ms) alarm occurs at all units in the parallel system connected by optical link
option. Furthermore, it is also necessary for the customer to create sequences that stop all
units using 30X (batch alarm output).
• After the converter protection function has activated and the cause of the alarm has been
eliminated, converters are restarted by resetting the alarms with the run command ON.
There is a risk of injury, and therefore alarms should be reset only after ensuring that the
run command is OFF (open).
• If the optic fiber cable connecting units is cut or damaged during converter operation,
normal operation will no longer possible, and so an alarm (converter link error: Erb)
status is forcibly triggered at the converter side. This alarm does not occur while
converters are stopped.
(1) Converter link error (Erb)
If the optic fiber cable is cut or damaged, or comes away from the connector during converter operation, a converter
link error (Erb) occurs, resulting in an alarm at all units. If converter alarm output is based on inverter external alarm
conditions, an alarm trip condition also occurs at the inverter, resulting in a free-run stop.
The alarm status cannot be cleared even by inputting a reset command (via keypad, terminal block or communication
system) if the cause of the alarm has not been eliminated. Always reset the alarm status after investigating the cause
of the alarm.
"Erb" troubleshooting
The following causes are likely when an Erb alarm occurs.
(1) The optic fiber cable is not connected, or the connector has not been fully inserted.
(2) The optic fiber cable is twisted with a curvature of less than 35 mm, or the cable is bent.
(3) The optic fiber cable connection plug does not match the color (blue, gray) of the PCB connector.
(4) The optic fiber cable connection does not form a loop. Always ensure that signals from the master are looped
back.
(5) Strong light (e.g., flashlight) is applied to the optical fiber.
(2) Operation procedure error (Er6)
An alarm occurs when the hardware switches are incorrectly set as follows.
• When optical link option hardware station address SW1 is set to 6 or higher.
• When the optical link option hardware station address SW1 setting is greater than H13 "No. of parallel system
slave stations".
When equipped with two optical link options.
9-52
(3) Batch alarm processing
If an alarm occurs at the master (slave) unit, the same alarm is displayed at all stations by optical transmission, a 30X
operation is performed, and the converters are cut off.
(4) Reset processing
All stations are batch reset provided that the alarm cause is cleared with a master (slave) reset command.
Reset conditions
Reset command from master
Reset command from slave
Master Alarm Status
Valid
Valid
Slave Alarm Status
Valid
Valid
9-53
Applicable to
All units
All units
9.8
9.8.1
SIR Option
Product overview
Large-capacity converter drive
RHC-D Series PWM converter transformer-less parallel systems drive converters by
connecting to multiple units (2 multiplex, 3 multiplex) without transformer at the primary
side in contrast to standard parallel systems that require primary side power supply
insulation with a transformer. This option applies to load sharing for all converters, and
facilitates drive with up to a 3 multiplex system.
Current sharing
To drive an inverter with multiple converters, it is necessary to equip each converter with
an optical link option. With this optical link, current commands allotted to converters are
conveyed instantly. Current is controlled (feedback control) for each converter, enabling
operation with load sharing determined by the drive capabilities of each converter.
Parallel/single system switching function
In cases such as where a single converter malfunctions when performing parallel system
drive, parallel system operation can be canceled and switched to standard single system
operation with the parallel/single system switching function.
[Installation restrictions]
It is not possible to equip converters with two SIR options at the same time. By doing so, operation procedure error
"Er6" will occur.
9.8.2
Model
Model: OPC-VG7-SIR
OptLRQQDPH6,5ĺ2SWLFDOOLQNRSWLRQIRUSDUDOOHOV\VWHPV
Accessories: Spacer x 3
Screw (M3) x 3
Optic fiber cable x 1 (for transmission/receipt)
9-54
9.8.3
Specifications
Control specifications
Item
Applicable converter
capacity
Parallel control method
Output voltage
Carrier frequency
Input power
Input power factor
Input harmonic current
Dedicated functions
Restart following
momentary power
interruption
Control function
Hardware
settings
Code
settings
Specifications
MD (CT) spec. (up to 2,400kW: 3 multiplex), LD (VT) spec. (up to 3,000kW: 3
multiplex)
AVR constant control with DC ACR minor
Fixed 710 VDC
2.5kHz
380 - 440 V, 50Hz/60Hz * The capacity must be reduced if less than 400 V.
Approx. 0.94 (30% load or higher)
The METI harmonic suppression countermeasure guidelines state that the scale factor Ki
can be 0.
Output is cut following a momentary power interruption, and the converter is restarted
when power is restored.
Slave units have partial functional restrictions.
Parallel
system
settings
Sets optional applications.
The parallel system setting is (SW2-1=ON, SW2-2=OFF).
Station
address
setting
Optional hardware switch SW1
SW1=0: master
6:VODYHVWDQGDUGVODYHLVVHWWR"1", and slave 2 is set to "2".
Parallel/single system switching is performed with function code H12 "Parallel system".
0: Parallel system disabled (factory default)
1: Parallel system enabled
When set to function code H12 = "Parallel system enabled", dynamic parallel/single
system switching is possible with digital input signal [OPT-DI].
The number of optically linked slave units is set with function code H13 "No. of parallel
system slave stations". With a two unit parallel system, for example, the number of slaves
will be "1".
Parallel
system
Slave
qty
setting
Main circuit non-insulation system parallel system
specifications
The optical link option is applied to multiple
converters, control is synchronized across each
converter, and load current sharing is controlled.
If using a common connection for DC circuits at the
converter output side, there is no need for an isolation
transformer at the main power supply side, enabling
transformer-less connection of the primary side of
each converter.
One of the features of parallel systems is that they are
compatible with large-capacity loads greater than the
single unit capacity.
R,S,T
R,S,T
R,S,T
Master
(RHC-4DE)
Slave 1
(RHC-4DE)
Slave 2
(RHC-4DE)
P,N
Note: Input filters used for transformer-less parallel
connections with RHC132S-4D to RHC315S-4D
should be configured with a filter stack. It is not
possible to configure filter circuits with peripheral
equipment.
OPCVG7-SIR
P,N
Inverter power supply
9-55
RHF
RHF
RHF
OPCVG7-SIR
P,N
OPCVG7-SIR
9.8.4
External drawings
5
3-䃥3.6
5
2
1
29
30
CN1
5
SW1
5
SW2
1 2
1 PH1
1
CN2
PH2
40
2
3
OPC-VG7-SIR EP-4222A-C
125
85
4
-
14
15
17
16
5
B
A
15.4
11.5
CN2
PH1
40
10
50
Unit: mm
Optional PCB external dimensions
Information on station address. switches, function selection switches, plastic optic fiber cables and connections,
basic connection diagram, operation, and protection function are the same as those for the SI option. Refer to
Sections 9.7.4 to 9.7.8 for details.
9-56
10 Specifications
10.1 Standard Specifications
MD (CT)-mode converters for medium load㻌
Three-phase 400 V class series (Stack type)
Item
Converter type
Input power
Output
ratings
Applicable inverter capacity
(kW)
Continuous capacity
(kW)
Overload rating
Output voltage
Required power supply
capacity (kVA)
Carrier frequency (kHz)
Number of phases,
voltage and frequency
Specifications
160
132
160
200
220
280
315
630
710
800
150
182
227
247
314
353
705
795
896
858
967
135 x 3
135 x 3
280
315
630
150% of the continuous rating for 1 minute
640 to 710 VDC (Varies depending upon the input voltage) *2
161
196
244
267
341
5
383
762
*3
Three-phase, 3-wire, 380-440 V/50 Hz, 380-460 V/60 Hz *4
Voltage: -15 to +10%, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less *5
Allowable voltage/
frequency fluctuation
Approx. mass (kg) *1
Enclosure
RHC…B-4DE *1
710
800
132
RHC…S-4DE
200
220
95
95
95
125
135
135
IP00, UL open type
135 x 3
Note: The above specifications apply when Function code F03 = 0 (MD (CT)).
*1 A single RHC…B-4DE unit consists of three stacks.
*2 The output voltage is approximately 640 VDC for 400 V source voltage, 686 VDC for 440 V, and 710 VDC for 460 V.
*3 2.5 kHz when the OPC-VG7-SIR is mounted (in transformerless connection).
*4 For 380-398 V/50 Hz and 380-430 V/60 Hz, tap switching is required inside the converter.
For less than 400 V, capacity should be derated.
Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V)
× 67
*5 Voltage unbalance (%) =
Three - phase average voltage (V)
LD (VT)-mode converters for light load㻌
Three-phase 400 V class series (Stack type)
Item
Converter type
Input power
Output
ratings
Applicable inverter capacity
(kW)
Continuous capacity
(kW)
Overload rating
Output voltage
Required power supply
capacity (kVA)
Carrier frequency (kHz)
Number of phases,
voltage and frequency
Specifications
800
132
160
160
200
220
315
355
710
800
1000
182
227
247
353
400
795
896
1120
280
315
110% of the continuous rating for 1 minute
640 to 710 VDC (Varies depending upon the input voltage)*2
196
244
267
383
433
858
967
1210
5 *3
Three-phase, 3-wire, 380-440 V/50 Hz, 380-460 V/60 Hz *4
Allowable voltage/
frequency fluctuation
Approx. mass (kg) *1
Enclosure
630
RHC…B-4DE *1
710
RHC…S-4DE
200
Voltage: -15 to +10%, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less *5
95
95
95
135
135
IP00, UL open type
135 x 3
135 x 3
Note: The above specifications apply when Function code F03 = 1 (LD (VT)).
*1 A single RHC…B-4DE unit consists of three stacks.
*2 The output voltage is approximately 640 VDC for 400 V source voltage, 686 VDC for 440 V, and 710 VDC for 460 V.
*3 2.5 kHz when the OPC-VG7-SIR is mounted (in transformerless connection).
*4 For 380-398 V/50 Hz and 380-430 V/60 Hz, tap switching is required inside the converter.
For less than 400 V, capacity should be derated.
Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V)
× 67
*5 Voltage unbalance (%) =
Three - phase average voltage (V)
10-1
135 x 3
10.2 Common Specifications
Table 10.2-1
Common Specifications
Item
Control method
Specifications
AVR control with DC ACR minor
Starts rectification when the converter is powered ON after connection.
Control
Running/Stopping
Running status signal
Running, power running, regenerative operation, ready-to-run, alarm output (for any
alarm), etc.
MD/LD switching
Selection between:
MD (CT): 150% of overload rating for 1 min.
and
LD (VT): 110% of overload rating for 1 min.
Carrier frequency
Fixed at 5 kHz (2.5 kHz when the OPC-VG7-SIR is mounted)
Input power factor
0.99 or above (at full load) (except when the OPC-VG7-SIR is mounted) *1
Input harmonics current
Conversion coefficient ki can be "0" according to the Japanese Guideline for
Suppressing Harmonics by the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry.
Restart after momentary
power failure
Shields the gate when the voltage level drops to the undervoltage level if a momentary
power failure occurs. And restarts the converter automatically when the power is
restored.
Power limiting control
Controls the power not to exceed the preset limit.
Alarm indication
Communication
Indication
(Protective function)
Structure
specification
Starts boosting when it receives a Run signal (terminals [RUN] and [CM]
short-circuited or a run command via the communications link). After that, the
converter is ready to run.
AC fuse blown, AC overvoltage, AC undervoltage, AC overcurrent, AC input current
error, input phase loss, power line frequency synchronization error, DC fuse blown,
DC overvoltage, DC undervoltage, charging circuit error, heat sink overheat, external
alarm, converter overheat, overload, memory error, keypad communications error,
CPU error, network device error, operation procedure error, A/D converter error,
optical network error
Alarm history
Saves and displays the most recent 10 alarm records.
Saves and displays the detailed information of the trip cause for the previous alarm.
Monitor
Displays input power, input current in (RMS), input voltage (RMS), DC link bus
voltage and power source frequency.
Load factor
Allows the user to measure the load factor with the keypad.
Display language
Function codes can be entered or referred to in any of the three languages--Japanese,
English and Chinese.
Charge lamp
Lights when the power is supplied to the converter. It also lights only when the control
power is being charged.
General specifications
Monitoring (polling) the running information, running status and function code data,
and controlling (selecting) the terminals [RUN], [RST] and [X1].
Note: Function codes except S codes cannot be written.
Enclosure
IP00
Cooling system
Forced cooling
Paint color
Munsell 6PB3/3, semi-gloss
*1 The input power factor is reduced to approximately 0.95 during regenerative operation when the power supply voltage
is 420 V and the operating load is 50% or above.
10-2
Input signals
Item
Name
Run/Stop command
[RUN]
Short-circuiting terminals [RUN] and [CM] starts boosting; opening them
stops it.
Alarm reset command
[RST]
When the converter stops due to an alarm, removing the alarm factor and
short-circuiting the terminals [RST] and [CM] cancels the protective function,
restarting the converter.
General-purpose
transistor input
[X1]
0: Enable external alarm trip THR 1: Cancel current limiter LMT-CCL
2: 73 answerback 73ANS
3: Switch current limiter I-LIM
4: Option D I OPT-DI
Digital input common
[CM]
Common terminal for digital input signals
Output signals
Alarm output
General-purpose
transistor output
(Standard 3 points,
extended 8 points)
[Y1]
[Y2]
[Y3]
[Y11]
to
[Y18]
Digital output common
[CME]
Relay output
[Y5A]
[Y5C]
(Standard 1 point)
Communication specifications
[30A]
[30B]
[30C]
[AO1]
Specification
Outputs a signal when the converter protective function is activated so that the
converter stops due to an alarm.
(Contact: 1C, Upon alarm, 30A-30C: ON)
(Contact capacity: 250 VAC, 0.3A, cosȭ=0.3 )
A "b" contact (normal close) can be set with Function code E14. Upon alarm,
30A-30C OFF.
0: Converter running RUN, 1: Converter ready to run RDY,
2: Power supply current limiting IL, 3: Lifetime alarm LIFE,
4: Heat sink overheat early warning PRE-OH,
5: Overload early warning PRE-OL, 6: Power running DRV,
7: Regenerating REG, 8: Current limiting early warning CUR,
9: Restarting after momentary power failure U-RES,
10: In synchronization with source frequency SY-HZ,
11: Alarm content 1 AL1, 12: Alarm content 2 AL2,
13: Alarm content 4 AL4, 14: Option DO OPT-DO
* Mounting the OPC-VG7-DIOA option makes 8 points of DO extended
functions available. (DI functions are not available.)
0: Input power PWR, 1: Input current in RMS I-AC,
2: Input voltage in RMS V-AC, 3: DC link bus voltage V-DC,
4: Power supply frequency FREQ, 5: +10V test P10, 6: -10V test N10
General-purpose analog
output
(Standard 1 point,
extended 2 points)
[AO4]
[AO5]
Analog output common
[M]
Common terminal for analog output signals
Charging circuit control
output
[73A]
[73C]
Control output for external charging circuit
General communication
specifications
* Mounting the OPC-VG7-AIO option makes 2 points of AO extended
functions available. (AI functions are not available.)
(Contact capacity: 250 VAC 5A max.)
Monitoring (polling) the running information, running status and function
code data, and controlling (selecting) the terminals [RUN], [RST] and [X1].
Note: Function codes except S codes cannot be written.
T-Link (Option)
Mounting the OPC-VG7-TL option enables communication with a T-Link
module of MICREX-F or MICREX-SX via a T-Link network.
SX Bus (Option)
Mounting the OPC-VG7-SX option enables communication with a
MICREX-SX via an SX bus network.
CC-Link (Option)
Mounting the OPC-VG7-CCL option enables communication with a CC-Link
master.
10-3
10.3 External Dimensions
Converter stack
RHC132S-4DE, RHC160S-4DE, RHC200S-4DE
10-4
Converter stack
RHC220S-4DE, RHC280S-4DE, RHC315S-4DE
10-5
V-phase stack of RHC630B-4DE, RHC710B-4DE, RHC800B-4DE
(The S-phase stack should be used in combination with the R- and T-phase stacks shown on the next page.)
10-6
Converter stack (U-/W-phase stack)
U-/W-phase stack of RHC630B-4DE, RHC710B-4DE, RHC800B-4DE
(The R- and T-phase stacks should be used in combination with the S-phase stack shown on the previous page.)
10-7
10.4
Peripheral Devices
(1) Boosting reactor
<Figure A>
<Figure B>
Detail of terminal 㸦LR4-710C㸸CuP㸬t8™100
Detail of terminal
Nameplate
MAX.DT
WP
4㸫ȍK
MAX.W
Boosting
reactor model
Rated
current
(A)
LR4-630C
1200
MAX.DT
MAX.H
MAX.H
Nameplate
LR4-800C㸸CuP㸬t10™100㸧
Rated
Inductance
capacity
(mH)
(kVA)
0.068
110.3
DP
WP
D
MAX.W
DP
4㸫ȍK
D
Dimensions (mm)
W
WP
D
DP
DT
H
K
MI
Weight
(kg)
600
200
440
390
285
640
19
-
450
Figure
Heatresistant
class
A
H
LR4-710C
1350
0.060
104.5
645
215
440
390
295
730
19
-
510
B
H
LR4-800C
1520
0.053
118.2
690
230
450
400
290
850
19
-
600
B
H
(2) Filtering reactor
<Figure A>
MAX.DT
Nameplate
MAX.H
CH
CW
Detail of terminal
㸦LFC4-630C㸸CuP㸬t10™75
LFC4-710C㸸CuP㸬t8™100
LFC4-800C㸸CuP㸬t10™100㸧
WP
MAX.W
Rated
Filtering
current
reactor model
(A)
LFC4-630C
1200
LFC4-710C
LFC4-800C
1350
1520
DP
4㸫ȍ㹉
Mounting
holes
D
Rated
Dimensions (mm)
Inductance
capacity
(mH)
K
(kVA) W WP D DP DT H
0.016
25.9
435 145 295 255 200 550 15
0.014
0.013
24.5
27.7
480 160 295 255 215 570
480 160 320 270 220 600
10-8
15
15
-
75
17.5
175
A
Heatresistant
class
H
-
100
100
30
30
190
220
A
A
H
H
M
Weight
CW CH (kg)
Figure
(3) Filtering capacitor
< Figure A >
㸲-ȭF
mounting hole
mounting hole
Filtering capacitor
model
CF4-630C
CF4-710C
CF4-800C
A
435
435
435
B
400
400
400
C
-
D
100
100
100
Dimensions (mm)
E
F
G
80 15 x 20 elongate hole 460
80 15 x 20 elongate hole 520
80 15 x 20 elongate hole 610
H
275
335
425
I
M12
M12
M12
Figure
Weight
(kg)
A
A
A
20.0
23.0
27.0
Note 1: There are restrictions on the mounting direction of the capacitors. Observe the mounting direction shown above.
Note 2: Each of the CF4-630C to CF4-800C consists of two capacitors. The table above shows values for a single
capacitor.
(4) Filtering resistor
<Figure A>
Filtering resistor model
equipped with cover
RF4-630C
400 V series
RF4-710C
RF4-800C
Figure
A
Weight (kg)
70
Q'ty
1
80
Note: A resistor is a heating element, so mount it at a place where it does not thermally affect other devices.
10-9
(5) AC fuse
74
20
58
150
< Figure B> HF5G2655
190
< Figure A> SA598473
32
6
86
150
90.25
4xȭ15
74.5
160.5
(6) Charging resistor
Dimensions (mm)
Charging resistor
model
G
H
J
L
M
Z
D
K
t
A
C
l
Weight
(kg)
GRZG400 1ȍ
40
40
9.5
385
411
10
47
39
2.4
10
5.5
330
0.85
10-10
10.5 Generating Loss
(1) Generating loss in the MD (CT) mode
Stacks
Converter stack
Generating loss
Model
(W)
RHC132S-4DE
2000
RHC160S-4DE
2950
RHC200S-4DE
3650
RHC220S-4DE
4150
RHC280S-4DE
5100
RHC315S-4DE
5750
RHC630B-4DE
11800
RHC710B-4DE
13200
RHC800B-4DE
14800
Filter stack
Generating loss
Model
(W)
2850
RHF160S-4DE
2850
RHF160S-4DE
3650
RHF220S-4DE
3650
RHF220S-4DE
4600
RHF280S-4DE
5200
RHF355S-4DE
-
Peripheral devices
Applicable
converter model
RHC630B-4DE
RHC710B-4DE
RHC800B-4DE
Boosting reactor
Generating
Model
loss (W)
LR4-630C
2300
LR4-710C
2600
LR4-800C
2900
Filtering reactor
Generating
Model
loss (W)
LFC4-630C
510
LFC4-710C
630
LFC4-800C
620
Filtering resistor
Generating
Model
loss (W)
RF4-630C
4722
RF4-710C
5361
RF4-800C
6024
(2) Generating loss in the LD (VT) mode
Stacks
Converter stack
Generating loss
Model
(W))
RHC132S-4DE
2400
RHC160S-4DE
3600
RHC200S-4DE
3950
RHC280S-4DE
5700
RHC315S-4DE
6400
RHC630B-4DE
13200
RHC710B-4DE
14650
RHC800B-4DE
18100
Filter stack
Generating loss
Model
(W)
2850
RHF160S-4D
3650
RHF220S-4D
3650
RHF220S-4D
5200
RHF355S-4D
5200
RHF355S-4D
-
Peripheral devices
Applicable
converter model
RHC630B-4DE
RHC710B-4DE
RHC800B-4DE
Boosting reactor
Generating
Model
loss (W)
LR4-710C
2600
LR4-800C
2900
LR4-1000C
4500
Filtering reactor
Generating
Model
loss (W)
LFC4-710C
630
LFC4-800C
620
LFC4-1000C
1080
10-11
Filtering resistor
Generating
Model
loss (W)
RF4-710C
5361
RF4-800C
6024
RF4-1000C
7728
11 Function Code Tables
11.1 Function Code Configuration
㹄 㸮㸮
Code number
Function code group
Table 11.1-1
Function Code Groups and Function Codes on Keypad
Function code group
Function codes
Fundamental functions
F codes
F00 to F08
Extension terminal functions
E codes
E01 to E27
High performance functions
H codes
H01 to H20
Serial communication functions
S codes
S01 to S03
Monitoring functions
M codes
M09 to M52
User application functions
U codes
U01 to U10
Remarks
These function codes are always
displayed on the keypad.
These function codes cannot be changed
from the keypad.
11.2 Function Code Tables
Table 11.2-1 provides descriptions about the column headers in function code tables.
Table 11.2-1
Column Headers in Function Code Tables
Column headers
Function code
Description
Function code group and code number
Link No.
Address to be used to refer to or change function code data via T-Link, SX bus or
CC-Link. Function codes with no address specification are inaccessible.
Communications
address
Data change is allowed only for S codes.
Function code name
Name assigned to a function code
Data setting range
Allowable data setting range and definition of each data.
Format
Indicates a format type to be used to refer to or change function code data via T-Link, SX
bus or CC-Link.
11-1
Table 11.2-2
Function
code
Communications
address
Fundamental Functions (F codes)
Function code name
Data setting range
Format
485 No Link No.
F00
0h
46h
Data protection
0 or 1
0: Enable data change
1: Protect data
This write-protects data from the keypad.
Use "STOP + ȃ / V" keys to change data.
40
F01
1h
47h
Harmonics suppressing
filter
0 or 1
0: With filter
1: Without filter
41
F02
2h
48h
Restart mode after
momentary power failure
(Selection)
0 or 1
0: Disable
1: Enable
42
F03
3h
49h
Current rating switching
0 or 1
0: MD (CT) mode (Overload current 150%)
1: LD (VT) mode (Overload current 110%)
43
F04
4h
4Ah
LED monitor
(Display selection)
0 to 5
0: Input power 1 (%)
1: Input power 2 (kW)
2: Input current (rms) (A)
3: Input voltage (rms) (V)
4: DC link bus voltage (V)
5: Source frequency (Hz)
44
F05
5h
4Bh
LCD monitor
(Display selection)
0 to 2
Switches the Run mode screen on the keypad.
0: Operation guide screen
1: Bar graph of running data 1 (Input power and
input current (rms))
2: Bar graph of running data 2 (Source voltage
fluctuation and source frequency fluctuation)
45
F06
6h
4Ch
LCD monitor
(Language selection)
0 to 2
0: Japanese
1: English
2: Chinese
46
F07
7h
4Dh
LCD monitor
(Contrast adjustment)
0 to 10
0 (Low) to 10 (High)
0
F08
8h
85h
Carrier frequency
Fixed at 5 kHz even any setting is made.
(2.5 kHz when the OPC-VG7-SIR is mounted)
59
11-2
Table 11.2-3
Function
code
E01
Communications
address
Extension Terminal Functions (E codes)
Function code name
Data setting range
Format
485 No Link No.
101h
4Eh
Terminal [X1] function
0 to 4
0: External alarm
1: Cancel current limiter
2: 73 answerback
3: Switch current limit
4: Option DI
47
THR
LMT-CCL
73ANS
I-LIM
OPT-DI
E02
102h
4Fh
Terminal [Y1] function
0 to 14
0: Converter running
RUN
1: Converter ready to run
RDY
2: Power supply current being limited IL
3: Lifetime alarm
LIFE
4: Heat sink overheat early warning PRE-OH
5: Overload early warning
PRE-OL
6: Power running
DRV
7: Regenerating
REG
8: Current limiting early warning
CUR
9: Restarting after momentary power failure
U-RES
10: In synchronization with source frequency
SY-HZ
11: Alarm content 1
AL1
12: Alarm content 2
AL2
13: Alarm content 3
AL4
14: Option DO
OPT-DO
48
E03
103h
50h
Terminal [Y2] function
Refer to Terminal [Y1] function.
48
E04
104h
51h
Terminal [Y3] function
Refer to Terminal [Y1] function.
48
E05
105h
52h
Terminal [Y5] function
Refer to Terminal [Y1] function.
48
E06
106h
53h
Terminal [Y11] function
(DIO option)
Refer to Terminal [Y1] function.
48
E07
107h
54h
Terminal [Y12] function
(DIO option)
Refer to Terminal [Y1] function.
48
E08
108h
55h
Terminal [Y13] function
(DIO option)
Refer to Terminal [Y1] function.
48
E09
109h
56h
Terminal [Y14] function
(DIO option)
Refer to Terminal [Y1] function.
48
E10
10Ah
57h
Terminal [Y15] function
(DIO option)
Refer to Terminal [Y1] function.
48
E11
10Bh
58h
Terminal [Y16] function
(DIO option)
Refer to Terminal [Y1] function.
48
E12
10Ch
59h
Terminal [Y17] function
(DIO option)
Refer to Terminal [Y1] function.
48
E13
10Dh
5Ah
Terminal [Y18] function
(DIO option)
Refer to Terminal [Y1] function.
48
E14
10Eh
5Bh
I/O function
(Normal open/close)
0000 to 007F
Defines the normal state of RUN, X1, Y1 to Y3,
Y5, and 30RY.
0: Normal open
1: Normal close
35
E15
10Fh
5Ch
RHC overload early
warning
50 to 105%
0
11-3
Function
code
Communications
address
Function code name
Data setting range
Format
485 No Link No.
E16
110h
5Dh
Cooling fan ON/OFF
control
0 or 1
0: Disable
1: Enable
This control detects the temperature of the heat sink
in the converter and turns the cooling fan on or off
automatically. If "Disable" is selected, the cooling
fan keeps running.
42
E17
111h
5Eh
Current limiting signal
(Hysteresis width)
0 to 30%
0
E18
112h
5Fh
AO1 function selection
0 to 10
0: Input power
1: Input current (rms)
2: Input voltage (rm)
3: DC link bus voltage
4: Source frequency
5: +10V output test
6: -10V output test
Refer to AO1 function selection.
50
PWR
I-AC
V-AC
V-DC
FREQ
P10
N10
E19
113h
60h
AO4 function selection
(AIO option)
E20
114h
61h
AO5 function selection
(AIO option)
Refer to AO1 function selection.
50
E21
115h
62h
AO1 gain setting
-100.00 to 100.00 (times)
7
E22
116h
63h
AO4 gain setting
(AIO option)
-100.00 to 100.00 (times)
7
E23
117h
64h
AO5 gain setting
(AIO option)
-100.00 to 100.00 (times)
7
E24
118h
65h
AO1 bias setting
-100.0 to 100.0%
6
E25
119h
66h
AO4 bias setting
(AIO option)
-100.0 to 100.0%
6
E26
11Ah
67h
AO5 bias setting
(AIO option)
-100.0 to 100.0%
6
E27
11Bh
68h
AO1-5 filter setting
0.000 to 0.500 s
4
11-4
50
Table 11.2-4
Function
code
Communications
address
High Performance Functions (H codes)
Function code name
Data setting range
Format
485 No Link No.
H01
401h
69h
Station address for
RS-485 communication
0 to 255
Enter the station address of RS-485.
0
H02
402h
70h
Error processing
(Common to
communications options
and RS-485)
0 to 3
0: Stop forcibly (Er4)
1: Stop (Er4) after running for the period specified
by timer H03.
2: Stop (Er4) if a communications error persists
exceeding the period specified by timer H33.
3: Continue to run
57
H03
403h
71h
Timer
0.01 to 20.00 s
3
H04
404h
6Ah
Baud rate
0 to 4
0: 38400 bps
1: 19200 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 4800 bps
4: 2400 bps
51
H05
405h
6Bh
Data length
0 or 1
0: 8 bits
1: 7 bits
52
H06
406h
6Ch
Parity check
0 to 2
0: None
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
53
H07
407h
6Dh
Stop bits
0 or 1
0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
54
H08
408h
Communications line
break time
0.0 to 60.0 s
0.0: Disable detection
0.1 to 60.0: Enable detection
If no access to stations (including own station) is
detected for the period specified by H08 during
operation due to any error (e.g., line break), the
converter causes an alarm Er4.
2
H09
409h
6Eh
Response interval
0.00 to 1.00 s
Enter the time until the converter issues a reply in
response to a request from the host.
3
H10
40Ah
6Fh
Protocol selection
0 to 3
0: Fuji's general-purpose inverter protocol
1: SX protocol (Loader protocol)(for in-house use)
2: Modbus RTU protocol
3: Trace protocol (OPC-RHC-TR)
55
H11
40Bh
-
H12
40Ch
H13
H14
TL communication format 0 or 1
(OPC-VG7-TL option)
0 : 4W + 4W
1 : 8W + 8W
56
72h
0 or 1
Parallel system
(OPC-VG7-SI/SIR option) 0: Disable
1: Enable
42
40Dh
73h
Number of slave stations 1 to 5
in parallel system
Enter the number of slaves (without master) when
(OPC-VG7-SI/SIR option) the parallel system is enabled.
0
40Eh
74h
Alarm data deletion
0 or 1
Setting H14 to "1" deletes all alarm data held in the
memory. After that, the H14 data automatically
reverts to "0."
11-5
11
Function
code
Communications
address
Function code name
Data setting range
Format
485 No Link No.
H15
40Fh
75h
Current limiter value
(Driving 1)
0 to 150%
16
H16
410h
76h
Current limiter value
(Driving 2)
0 to 150%
16
H17
411h
77h
Current limiter value
(Braking 1)
-150 to 0%
16
H18
412h
78h
Current limiter value
(Braking 2)
-150 to 0%
16
H19
413h
79h
Current limiter early
warning (Level)
-150 to 150%
16
H20
414h
7Ah
Current limiter early
warning (Timer)
0 to 60 s
0
Table 11.2-5
Function
code
Communications
address
User Application Functions (U codes)
Function code name
Data setting range
Format
485 No Link No.
U01
B01h
7Bh
Reserved.
-32768 to 32767
5
U02
B02h
7Ch
SX bus station number
monitor
-32768 to 32767
5
U03
B03h
7Dh
Reserved.
0000 to FFFF
9
U04
B04h
7Eh
AVR control response
-32768 to 32767
5
U05
B05h
7Fh
DC voltage selection
-32768 to 32767
5
U06
B06h
80h
Reserved.
-32768 to 32767
5
U07
B07h
81h
Reserved.
-32768 to 32767
5
U08
B08h
82h
Reserved.
-32768 to 32767
5
U09
B09h
83h
Reserved.
-32768 to 32767
5
U10
B10h
84h
Reserved.
-32768 to 32767
5
11-6
11.3 List of Communication-dedicated Function Codes
S codes
Table 11.3-1
Function
code
S01
S02
S03
Serial Communication Functions (S codes)
Communications
address
Function code name
485 No Link No.
701h
1h
Operation
702h
2h
Power supply current limit (Driving)
703h
3h
Power supply current limit (Braking)
Data setting range
0000 to FFFF
0.01% / 1d
0.01% / 1d
Format
32
7
7
Although the writing of S02 and S03 is always possible, as for reflection of write-in data, a converter is performed at the time of a stop.
M codes
Table 11.3-2
Function
code
M01 to
M08
M09
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
Communications
address
Function code name
485 No Link No.
Reserved.
809h
80Ah
80Bh
80Ch
80Dh
80Eh
80Fh
810h
811h
812h
17h
18h
19h
1Ah
1Bh
1Ch
1Dh
1Eh
1Fh
20h
M19
813h
21h
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27 to
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
M41
M42
M43
M44
M45
M46
M47
814h
815h
816h
817h
818h
819h
81Ah
-
22h
23h
24h
25h
26h
27h
28h
-
823h
824h
825h
826h
828h
829h
82Ah
82Bh
82Ch
82Dh
82Fh
31h
32h
33h
34h
36h
37h
38h
39h
3Ah
3Bh
3Dh
830h
834h
M48
M49 to
M51
M52
Monitoring Functions (M codes)
Data setting range
-
Format
-
Source frequency
Input power
Input current (rms)
Input voltage (rms)
Run command
Running status
Output terminals Y1 to Y18
Alarm content, latest alarm
Alarm content, previous alarm
Alarm content, alarm before previous
one
Alarm content, alarm before two
previous ones
Cumulative run time
DC link bus voltage
DC link bus voltage (P.U.)
Model code
Capacity code
Converter ROM (main control) version
Transmission error code
Reserved.
0.1 Hz / 1d
0.1 kW / 1d
0.1 A / 1d
0.1 V / 1d
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
2
2
2
2
32
21
33
14
15
15
0000 to FFFF
15
10h / 1d
1V / 1d
0 to 65535 V
0000 to FFFF
0 to 29
0000 to FFFF
0 to 65535
-
0
0
0
29
28
9
34
-
0.1Hz / 1d
0.1kW / 1d
0.1A / 1d
0.1V / 1d
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
10h / 1d
1 V / 1d
1rC / 1d
1rC / 1d
10h / 1d
2
2
2
2
21
33
0
0
5
5
0
3Eh
-
Source frequency at alarm
Input power at alarm
Input current (rms) at alarm
Input voltage (rms) at alarm
Reserved.
Running status at alarm
Output terminal at alarm
Cumulative run time at alarm
DC link voltage at alarm
Converter internal temperature at alarm
Heat sink temperature at alarm
Service life of capacitor on printed
circuit board
Cooling fan service life
-
10h / 1d
-
0
-
42h
Control output
0000 to FFFF
11-7
125
11.4 Data Format List
Data format 0 to 13
* Handle data formats 40 to 57 as format "0."
Format
Description
Display or setting
Integer
Integer
0, 1, 2, 3, .......
0, 2, 4, 6, .......
0.0, 0.1, 0.2, ........
0.00, 0.01, 0.02, ........
0.001, 0.002, 0.003, ......
-2, -1, 0, 1, 2, ........
-0.1, 0.0, 0.1, ......
-0.01, 0.00, 0.01, ......
-0.001, 0.000, 0.001, ....
1A8E
0.75, 1 , 2, ...... 14, 15
Min. increment
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HEX
Special data 3
11
Operation data
1
12
13
Exponent/mantissa data 1
Exponent/mantissa data 2
0.01
0.01
Fixed point
Integer (signed)
Fixed point (signed)
Remarks
1
2
0.1
0.01
0.001
1
0.1
0.01
0.001
1h
After the data is written, the
setting automatically reverts to
"0."
Data format 14 to 34, 125
Format [14]: (Cause of alarm)
15 12
8 7
0
Alarm code ··················· 0 to 31
Order of alarm ··············· 1st to 5th
Number of alarms············ 1 to 5 alarms
Alarm code
Code Display
0
1
--ACF
2
Description
No alarm
AC fuse blown
Code Display
12
13
OH1
OH2
AOU AC overvoltage
14
OH3
3
4
ALU
AOC
15
16
OLU
Er1
5
ACE
17
Er2
6
LPU
18
7
FrE
AC undervoltage
AC overcurrent
AC input current
error
Input phase loss
Power line frequency
synchronization error
8
dCF
9
Description
Er3
Heat sink overheat
External alarm
Overheat inside
converter
Overload
Memory error
Keypad
communications error
CPU error
19
Er4
Network device error
DC fuse blown
20
Er6
dOU
DC overvoltage
21
Er8
10
dLU
DC undervoltage
22
Erb
11
PbF
Charging circuit
error
Operation procedure
error
A/D converter error
Optical network
error
11-8
Code Display
Description
24
25
Ar1
Ar2
User alarm 1
User alarm 2
26
Ar3
User alarm 3
27
28
Ar4
Ar5
User alarm 4
User alarm 5
29
Ar6
User alarm 6
30
Ar7
User alarm 7
31
Ar8
User alarm 8
Format [15]: (Alarm history)
15
8 7
0
Alarm code ·························· 0 to 31 (Refer to format [14].)
Occurrence of same alarm ······ 0 to 255 times
Format [16]: (Ratio)
15
8 7
0
Ratio·········· -300% to 300% (-30000 to 30000)
Format [21]: (Running status)
15
8
7
0
0) RUN (Converter running)
1) INT (Converter shutdown)
2) DRV (Power running)
3) REG (Regenerating)
4) NUV (DC link bus voltage establishment)
5) ALM (Batch failure)
6 to 14) Not used.
15) -···················· Writing
0: OFF, 1: ON
Format [28]: Converter capacity
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Converter capacity
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
Code
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Converter capacity
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
Code
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Converter capacity
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
280
Format [29]: Converter model (Common system with Fuji's inverters)
Code: C414h fixed
11-9
Code
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
Converter capacity
315
355
400
500
630
710
800
Format [32]: Run command, Format [33]: Y1 to Y18
This format is for S01 and M15.
15
8
7
0
0)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
[32]
RUN (Run command)
X1
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
X11
X12
X13
X14
RST (Reset command)
[33]
Y1
Y2
Y3
Not used.
Y5A
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y14
Y15
Y16
Y17
Y18
0: OFF, 1: ON
Format [34]: Communications error code
15
M26 code *1
0
8
7
0
Indication on
Communications error name
keypad *2
Not a communications error
1 to 31 *3
-
48 to 70
71
72
73
74
04
05
06
01
75
76
77
01
07
07
78
02
79
80
81
07
03
07
Characteristic alarm code
exclusively for RHC-D-Type
Reserved.
Checksum error, CRC error
Parity error
Others (Overrun, framing, etc.)
Format error
Concrete operation specifications
Normal communication
Arbitrary data is written at function code with missing address.
(Those having an excessive address are separately defined.)
Data is read from missing address of the function code.
(o Reading "0000")
Data exceeding the allowable range of the S area is written. The data
is limited at the upper or lower limit value.
Alarm code for other than communication characteristic to RHC-D
Not used with RHC-D.
Software error
The sum or CRC value does not agree.
The
parity does not agree.
Hardware error *4
Physical (reception) error other than above
There is an error in the format. The transmission request character is
incorrect. The end of text character is not transmitted in the designated
order.
Command error
A code other than the designated command is sent.
Link priority error
Not used with RHC-D.
Function code data writing right Not used with RHC-D.
error
Function code error
c Data exceeding the function code address range is accessed (access
to F09 or later).
d Data longer than 16 words is written.
Write protection
c A read-only code (except S codes) is written.
Data error
Not used.
Error in writing cycle
Not used.
*1 Communications error codes 71 to 81 are common among models. However, the cause of operation may be characteristic to specific
models.
*2 The keypad does not display the communications error code value itself but displays "panel indication at keypad."
*3 Alarm codes 1 to 31 are the code system characteristic to RHC-D different from inverter assignment.
*4 The parity error is displayed as "other physical errors" (M26: 73) in the RS-485 communication mode.
11-10
Format [125]: Control output
15
8
7
0
0)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
Converter running
Converter ready to run
Power supply current being limited
Lifetime alarm
Heat sink overheat early warning
Overload early warning
Power running
Regenerating
Current limiting early warning
Restarting after momentary power failure
In synchronization with source frequency
Alarm content 1
Alarm content 2
Alarm content 3
Option Do
Not used.
11-11
RUN
RDY
IL
LIFE
PRE-OH
PRE-OL
DRV
REG
CUR
U-RES
SY-HZ
AL1
AL2
AL4
OPT-DO
12
CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS
12.1 Compliance with European Standards (
)
The CE marking on Fuji products indicates that they comply with the essential requirements of the
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive 2004/108/EC, Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, and Machinery
Directive 2006/42/EC which are issued by the Council of the European Communities.
Table 12.1-1
Combination
EMC
Directives
Low Voltage
Directive
Machinery
Directive
Functional
Safety
Standard
12.1.1
Conformity with Standards
Standards
PWM converter :
Diode rectifier :
RHC132S-4D□~RHC315S-4D□
RHD200S-4D□,RHD315S-D□
RHC630B-4D□~RHC800B-4D□
Inverter :
Inverter :
FRN30SVG1S-4□~FRN315SVG1S-4□
FRN30SVG1S-4□~FRN315SVG1S-4□
FRN630BVG1S-4□~FRN800BVG1S-4□
FRN630BVG1S-4□~FRN800BVG1S-4□
IEC/EN61800-3 :2004 +A1 2012
Immunity : Second environment (Industrial)
Emission : Category C3
IEC/EN61326-3-1 : 2008
IEC/EN61800-5-1: 2007
EN ISO13849-1 : 2008 PL-d, Category 3
IEC/EN 60204- : 2009 Stop category 0
IEC/EN 61800-5-2: 2007 SIL2
IEC/EN 62061 : 2010 SIL2
Compliance with EMC standards
The CE marking on inverters does not ensure that the entire equipment including our CE-marked products is
compliant with the EMC Directive. Therefore, CE marking for the equipment shall be the responsibility of the
equipment manufacturer. For this reason, Fuji’s CE mark is indicated under the condition that the product shall be
used within equipment meeting all requirements for the relevant Directives. Instrumentation of such equipment
shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer.
Generally, machinery or equipment includes not only our products but other devices as well. Manufacturers,
therefore, shall design the whole system to be compliant with the relevant Directives.
„ List of EMC-compliant filters
To satisfy the requirements noted above, use inverters in combination with an external filter (option) dedicated to
Fuji inverters. In either case, mount inverters in accordance with the installation procedure given below. To ensure
the compliance, it is recommended that inverters be mounted in a metal panel.
Filter
PWM
Diode
Power
Leakage current *1
MD/LD
Remarks
converter
rectifier
supply
Under
Under
mode
type
voltage
type
type
normal
worst-case
conditions conditions
Three-phase
400V
RHC132S-4D□
-
RHC160S-4D□
-
RHC200S-4D□
RHD200S-4D□
RHC220S-4D□
-
RHC280S-4D□
-
RHC315S-4D□
RHD315S-4D□
RHC630B-4D□
-
RHC710B-4D□
-
RHC800B-4D□
-
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
FS5536-400-99-1
78
439
FN3359-800-99
38
227
FN3359-1600-99
38
227
FN3359-2500-99
38
227
*1 Calculated based on these measuring conditions: 400V, 50 Hz, interphase voltage unbalance ratio 2%.
12-1
„ Recommended installation procedure
To make the machinery or equipment fully compliant with the EMC Directive, have certified technicians wire the
filter stack, the PWM converter, the diode rectifier, the inverter and the motor and in strict accordance with the
procedure described below.
When an EMC-compliant filter (option) is externally used
1) Mount the filter stack, the PWM converter, the diode rectifier, the inverter and the filter on a grounded panel or
metal plate. Use shielded wires for the motor cable and route the cable as short as possible. Firmly clamp the
shields to the metal plate to ground them. Further, connect the shielding layers electrically to the grounding
terminal of the motor.
2) For connection to control terminals of the filter stack, the PWM converter, the diode rectifier and the inverter
and for connection of the RS-485 communication signal cable, use shielded wires. As with the motor, clamp the
shields firmly to a grounded panel.
In the case of the combination of the PWM converter and the inverter.
In the case of the combination of the PWM converter.
In the case of the combination of the diode rectifier and the inverter.
Figure 12.1-1 Mounting an EMC-compliant Filter (option) in a Metal Panel
12-2
12.1.2
Harmonic component regulation in the EU
When you use general-purpose industrial inverters in the EU, the harmonics emitted from the inverter to power
lines are strictly regulated as stated below.
If an inverter is connected to public low-voltage power supply, it is regulated by the harmonics emission
regulations from inverters to power lines (with the exception of industrial low-voltage power lines). Refer to Figure
12.1-3 below for details.
Figure 12.1-3
Compliance with IEC/EN 61000-3-2
Power supply voltage
Three-phase 400 V
Power Source and Regulation
Diode rectifier / PWM converter type
RHD200S-4D□,RHD315S-D□
RHC132S-4D□~RHC315S-4D□
RHC630B-4D□~RHC800B-4D□
Conformity
○
*1
To obtain the data with the harmonics current data, contact your Fuji Electric representative.
Use the inverter applied by combination within the limits of each diode rectifier or PWM converter.
*1 To conform to the diode rectifier or the PWM converter compliance with the IEC/EN 61000-3-12, connect
them to the power supply whose short-circuit ratio Rsce is 120 or above.
12-3
12.1.3
Compliance with the low voltage directive in the EU
General-purpose inverters are regulated by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU. Fuji Electric states that all our
inverters with CE marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive.
„ Note
If installed according to the guidelines given below, inverters marked with CE are considered as compliant with
the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
Compliance with European Standards
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems (PDS).
Part 5-1: Safety requirements. Electrical, thermal and energy. IEC/EN61800-5-1: 2007
1. The ground terminal G should always be connected to the ground. Do not use only a residual-current-operated
protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)* as the sole method of electric shock protection. Be sure
to use ground wires whose size is greater than power supply lines.
*With overcurrent protection.
2. To prevent the risk of hazardous accidents that could be caused by damage of the inverter, install the specified fuses in
the supply side (primary side) according to the following tables.
AC fuse : Breaking capacity: Min. 10 kA, Rated voltage: Min. 500 V
DC fuse : Breaking capacity: Min. 10 kA, Rated voltage: Min. 800 V
RHD□S-4D series
Power
Diode rectifier
supply
type
voltage
SVG1 series
HD/LD AC Fuse rating
mode
(A)
MD
Three- RHD200S-4D□
LD
phase
MD
400V
RHD315S-4D□
LD
RHC□S-4D series
Power
PWM converter HD/LD
supply
type
mode
voltage
MD
RHC132S-4D□
LD
MD
RHC160S-4D□
LD
MD
RHC200S-4D□
LD
RHC220S-4D□
MD
MD
ThreeRHC280S-4D□
LD
phase
400V
MD
RHC315S-4D□
LD
MD
RHC630B-4D□
LD
MD
RHC710B-4D□
LD
MD
RHC800B-4D□
LD
630(IEC60269-4)
630(IEC60269-4)
900(IEC60269-4)
1000(IEC60269-4)
AC Fuse rating
(A)
400(IEC60269-4)
450(IEC60269-4)
450(IEC60269-4)
630(IEC60269-4)
630(IEC60269-4)
700(IEC60269-4)
700(IEC60269-4)
800(IEC60269-4)
900(IEC60269-4)
900(IEC60269-4)
1000(IEC60269-4)
1800(IEC60269-4)
2000(IEC60269-4)
2000(IEC60269-4)
2500(IEC60269-4)
2500(IEC60269-4)
3000(IEC60269-4)
Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the enclosure or the
shipping destination.
RHD□S-4D series
12-4
Nominal
Power
applied
supply
Inverter type
motor
voltage
(kW)
30
FRN30SVG1S
-4□
37
FRN37SVG1S
-4□
45
FRN45SVG1S
-4□
55
FRN55SVG1S
-4□
75
FRN75SVG1S
-4□
90
FRN90SVG1S
-4□
110
FRN110SVG1S
-4□
132
FRN132SVG1S
-4□
Three- 160
FRN160SVG1S
phase
-4□
400V
200
FRN200SVG1S
-4□
220
FRN220SVG1S
-4□
250
FRN250SVG1S
-4□
280
FRN280SVG1S
-4□
315
FRN315SVG1S
-4□
355
630
FRN630BVG1S
-4□
710
FRN710BVG1S
-4□
800
FRN800BVG1S
-4□
1000
HD/
LD
mode
DC Fuse rating
(A)
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
200(IEC60269-4)
200(IEC60269-4)
200(IEC60269-4)
200(IEC60269-4)
250(IEC60269-4)
250(IEC60269-4)
250(IEC60269-4)
315(IEC60269-4)
315(IEC60269-4)
400(IEC60269-4)
400(IEC60269-4)
400(IEC60269-4)
400(IEC60269-4)
500(IEC60269-4)
500(IEC60269-4)
630(IEC60269-4)
630(IEC60269-4)
800(IEC60269-4)
800(IEC60269-4)
800(IEC60269-4)
800(IEC60269-4)
900(IEC60269-4)
900(IEC60269-4)
1000(IEC60269-4)
1000(IEC60269-4)
1250(IEC60269-4)
1250(IEC60269-4)
1250(IEC60269-4)
1800(IEC60269-4)
1800(IEC60269-4)
2000(IEC60269-4)
2000(IEC60269-4)
2000(IEC60269-4)
2500(IEC60269-4)
Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU (Continued)
RHC□S-4D series
3. When used with the inverter, a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), residual-current-operated protective
device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) or magnetic contactor (MC) should conform to the EN or
IEC standards.
4. When you use a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) for
protection from electric shock in direct or indirect contact power lines or nodes, be sure to install type B of
RCD/ELCB on the input (primary) of the inverter if the power supply is three-phase 400 V.
5. The inverter should be used in an environment that does not exceed Pollution Degree 2 requirements. If the
environment conforms to Pollution Degree 3 or 4, install the inverter in an enclosure of IP54 or higher.
6. Install the inverter, AC or DC reactor, input or output filter in an enclosure with minimum degree of protection
of IP2X (Top surface of enclosure shall be minimum IP4X when it can be easily accessed), to prevent
human body from touching directly to live parts of these equipment.
7. Do not connect any copper wire directly to grounding terminals. Use crimp terminals with tin or equivalent
plating to connect them.
8. When you use an inverter at an altitude of more than 2000 m, you should apply basic insulation for the
control circuits of the inverter. The inverter cannot be used at altitudes of more than 3000 m.
9. Use wires listed in IEC60364-5-52.
Three
phase
400 V
Diode rectifier
type
RHD200S-4D□
RHD315S-4D□
2
Recommended wire/copper bar size (mm )
Main circuit
MCCB or
Main power
Diode rectifier
RCD/ELCB
input *2
output
*1
Control
Ground
[L1/R, L2/S, L3/T]
[P(+),N(-)]
Rated
circuit
terminal
*2
current
[ G]
Copper
Copper
Wire
Wire
bar
bar
MD
500
240
300
120
t5×30
t4×40
(150)
(160)
LD
500
240
150×2
120
0.75
MD
700
185×2
300×2
185
t10×30
t8×50
(300)
(400)
LD
800
240×2
300×2
240
HD/LD mode
Power supply
voltage
RHD□S-4D series
PWM converter
type
RHC132S-4D□
RHC160S-4D□
Three phase 400 V
RHC200S-4D□
RHC220S-4D□
RHC280S-4D□
RHC315S-4D□
RHC630B-4D□
RHC710B-4D□
RHC800B-4D□
2
HD/LD mode
Power supply
voltage
RHC□S-4D series
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MCCB or
RCD/ELCB
Main power
*1
input *2
Rated
[L1/R, L2/S, L3/T]
current
Copper
Wire
bar
300
120
350
150
350
150
t5×30
(150)
500
240
500
240
500
240
500
240
600
150×2
t10×30
700
185×2
(300)
700
185×2
800
240×2
1400
240×4
1600
300×4
1600
300×4
t10×125
1800
240×5
(1250)
1800
240×5
2200
Fan
power
supply
[R1, T1]
2.5
Recommended wire/copper bar size (mm )
Main circuit
R0,T0
PWM converter
R1,S1,T1
output
Ground Charging Control
R2,T2
[P(+),N(-)]
circuit
circuit
terminal
R3,T3
*2,*3
[L4,L5,L6]
[ G]
73A,73C
Copper
Wire
bar
120
70
150
95
150
95
t4×40
(160)
240
120
240
120
300
150
300
150
185×2
185
t8×50
185×2
185
2.5
0.75
2.5
(400)
185×2
185
240×2
120×2
185
120×2
120×2
t8×50
120×2
(400)
120×2
300×6
12-5
150×2
Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU (Continued)
SVG1 series
30
Inverter type
FRN30SVG1S-4□
37
FRN37SVG1S-4□
45
FRN45SVG1S-4□
55
75
FRN55SVG1S-4□
FRN75SVG1S-4□
90
FRN90SVG1S-4□
110
Three phase 400 V
FRN110SVG1S-4□
132
FRN132SVG1S-4□
160
FRN160SVG1S-4□
200
FRN200SVG1S-4□
220
FRN220SVG1S-4□
250
FRN250SVG1S-4□
280
FRN280SVG1S-4□
315
355
630
FRN315SVG1S-4□
FRN630BVG1S-4□
710
FRN710BVG1S-4□
800
FRN800BVG1S-4□
HD/LD mode
Power supply
voltage
Nominal applied
motor (kW)
2
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
DC input
[P(+),N(-)]
*2
Copper
bar
t3×25
(75)
t3×30
(90)
t4×40
(160)
t8×50
(400)
t8×50
(400)
*3
Wire
16
25
25
35
35
35
35
70
70
95
95
120
120
150
150
240
240
300
300
150×2
150×2
185×2
185×2
240×2
240×2
300×2
300×2
300×2
-
Recommended wire/ copper bar size (mm )
Main circuit
Aux.
Inverter output
control
[U,V,W]
Ground Control
power
*2
terminal circuit
supply
[ G]
[R0, T0]
Copper
Wire
bar
16
16
25
16
25
16
35
16
25
16
35
16
35
16
70
35
70
35
70
50
70
50
95
70
95
70
120
95
120
95
185
120
185
120
t5×30
0.75
2.5
(150)
240
150
240
150
300
150
300
150
150×2
185
150×2
185
185×2
240
t10×30
(300)
185×2
240
240×2
300
240×2
300
240×2
300
240×4 185 *3
300×4 120×2 *3
t10×125 300×4
120×2 *3
(1250)
300×5 150×2 *3
*3
300×5 150×2 *3
300×6 150×2 *3
Fan
power
supply
[R1, T1]
-
2.5
Note: A box (†) replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the enclosure or the shipping destination.
*1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) will vary, depending on
the power transformer capacity. Refer to the related technical documentation for details.
*2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70°C 600 V PVC wires used at a surrounding
temperature of 40°C.
*3 The size of wire or copper bar of stack by phase is a part for 1 phase (1 stack).
12-6
Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU (Continued)
10. The inverter has been tested with IEC/EN61800-5-1 2007 5.2.3.6.3 Short-circuit Current Test under the
following conditions.
Short-circuit current in the supply: 10,000 A
Maximum 480 V for 400 V class series
11. Use this inverter at the following power supply system.
*1 Use this inverter at the following IT system.
Non-earthed (isolated from earth) IT system
IT system which earthed neutral by an impedance
Corner earthed / Phase-earthed IT system by an
impedance
Can be used.
In this case the insulation between the control
interface and the main circuit of the inverter is
basic insulation. Thus do not connect SELV
circuit from external controller directly (make
connection using a supplementary insulation.).
Use an earth fault detector able to disconnect
the power within 5s after the earth fault occurs.
Can not be used.
*2 Cannot apply to Corner earthed / Phase-earthed TT system of 400V type
12. As the touch current (leakage current) of inverters is relatively high, it is of essential importance to always
assure a reliable connection to Protective Earth (PE). The minimum cross sectional area of the PE-conductor
should be:
- 10 mm2 (Cu-conductors) - 16 mm2 (Al-conductors)
Three Phase PDS (Power Drive System) with touch currents ≥ 3.5 mA AC or ≥ 10 mA DC
An electric shock could occur.
12-7
12.2 Compliance with Functional Safety Standard
12.2.1 General
In FRENIC-VG series of inverters, opening the hardware circuit between terminals [EN1]-[PS] or between
terminals [EN2]-[PS] stops the output transistor, coasting the motor to a stop. (EN1: Enable input 1, EN2: Enable
input 2) This is the Safe Torque Off (STO) function prescribed in IEC/EN60204-1, Category 0 (Uncontrolled stop)
and compliant with Functional Safety Standard.
Using the Safe Torque Off (STO) function eliminates the need of external safety circuit breakers while
conventional inverters need those breakers to configure the Functional Safety Standard compliant safety system.
• The output shutdown function of this inverter uses the Safe Torque Off (STO) function prescribed in
IEC/EN61800-5-2 so that it does not completely shut off the power supply to the motor electrically. Depending
upon applications, therefore, additional measures are necessary for safety of end-users, e.g., brake function
that locks the machinery and motor terminal protection that prevents possible electrical hazard(s).
• The output shutdown function does not completely shut off the power supply to the motor electrically. Before
starting wiring or maintenance jobs, turn OFF the power and wait at least ten minutes. Make sure that the
LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a multimeter or a similar
instrument, that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P(+) and N(-) has dropped to the safe level
(+25 VDC or below).
Enable terminals and peripheral circuit, and internal circuit configuration
Safety circuit breakers complying with
EN ISO13849-1 PL=d Cat. 3 or higher
Conventional inverter
Motor
M
Power supply
3~
"Enable" input
Safety switch complying with
EN ISO13849-1 PL=d Cat. 3 or higher
Emergency
stop button
Reset
EFigure 12.2-1
Conventional Inverters
FRENIC-VG (FRN††VG1†-††)
Safety relay unit complying with
EN ISO13849-1 PL=d Cat. 3 or
higher
Power
supply
Reset
"Enable"
input
Emergency
stop button
Output transistor
[P(+)]
[U]
[V]
[W]
[N(-)]
[PS]
[EN1]
[EN2]
Motor
6
Gate driver
6
[Y1]*
[CMY]*
CPU
*Transistor output terminals (e.g., [Y1]-[CMY], DECF (Function code data=80),
Refer to Section 6.1)
Figure 12.2-2
FRN□□VG1□-□□
12-8
M
3~
12.2.2 Notes for compliance to Functional Safety Standard
1) Wiring for terminals [EN1] (Enable input 1) and [EN2] (Enable input 2)
• [EN1]/[EN2] and [PS] are terminals prepared for connection of safety related wires; therefore, careful wiring
should be performed to ensure that no short-circuit(s) can occur to these terminals.
• Stopping the current flowing through terminal [EN1] or [EN2] activates the safety stop function. For opening
and closing the hardware circuit between terminals [EN1]/[EN2] and [PS], use safety approved components
such as safety relays that comply with EN ISO13849-1 PL=d Cat. 3 or higher to ensure a complete shutoff.
• It is the responsibility of the machinery manufacturer to guarantee that a short-circuiting or other fault does not
occur in wiring of external safety components between terminals [EN1]/[EN2] and [PS].
Fault examples:
- Terminals [EN1]/[EN2] and [PS] are short-circuited due to the wiring being caught in the door of the panel so
that a current continues to flow in terminal [EN1]/[EN2] although the safety component is OFF and therefore
the safety function may NOT operate.
- The wiring is in contact with any other wire so that a current continues to flow in terminal [EN1]/[EN2] and
therefore the safety function may NOT operate.
• To activate the STO function correctly, be sure to keep terminals [EN1] and [EN2] OFF for at least 50 ms.
• When inputting test pulses sent from the safety PLC to terminals [EN1] and [EN2], keep the pulse width of the
OFF signal 1 ms or less.
• When using the functional safety card OPC-VG1-SAFE, keep the jumper bars mounted between terminals
[EN1]/[EN2] and [PS] since those terminals cannot be used. For the Safe Torque Off (STO) function, use
terminals [ST1] and [ST2] on the functional safety card.
2) Note for Safe Torque Off (STO)
• When configuring the product safety system with this Safe Torque Off (STO) function, make a risk assessment
of not only the external equipment and wiring connected to terminals [EN1] and [EN2] (Enable input 1 and
Enable input 2) but also the whole system including other equipment, devices and wiring against the product
safety system required by the machinery manufacturer under the manufacturer's responsibility in order to
confirm that the whole system conforms to the product safety system required by the machinery manufacturer.
In addition, as preventive maintenance, the machinery manufacturer must perform periodical inspections to
check that the product safety system properly functions.
• To bring the inverter into compliance with Functional Safety Standard, it is necessary to install the inverter on a
control panel with the enclosure rating of IP54 or above.
• To bring the inverter into compliance with Functional Safety Standard, it is necessary to bring it into
compliance with European Standards IEC/EN61800-5-1 and IEC/EN61800-3.
• This Safe Torque Off (STO) function coasts the motor to a stop. When a mechanical brake is used to stop or
hold the motor for the sake of the product safety system of whole system, do not use the inverter's control
signals such as output from terminal [Y]. (Using control signals does not satisfy the safety standards because
of software intervention.) Use safety relay units complying with EN ISO13849-1 PL=d Cat. 3 or higher to
activate mechanical brakes.
• The safety shutdown circuit between terminal [EN1] and [EN2] input sections and inverter's output shutdown
section is dual-configured (redundant circuit) so that an occurrence of a single fault does not detract the Safe
Torque Off (STO).
If a single fault is detected in the safety shutdown circuit, the inverter coasts the motor to a stop even with the
[EN1]-[PS] and [EN2]-[PS] states being ON, as well as outputting an alarm to external equipment. (Note that
the alarm output function is not guaranteed to all of single faults. It is compliant with EN ISO13849-1 PL=d Cat.
3).
• The Safe Torque Off (STO) function does not completely shut off the power supply to the motor electrically.
Before starting wiring or maintenance jobs, be sure to disconnect the input power to the inverter. For details,
refer to "wiring" in the safety precautions given on page vi.
• In the case of a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM), a voltage is generated on the motor
terminals even during "coast to a stop" caused by the Safe Torque Off (STO) function. When handling the live
parts, therefore, be sure to check that the motor is stopped and cut off the input power to the inverter
beforehand.
3) Checking wiring
If wiring is changed in the initial start-up or maintenance, be sure to perform the following test with
the inverter stopped.
• Turn each of terminals [EN1] and [EN2] OFF (open) and ON (short) and check on the I/O check screen of the
keypad that the relevant section turns "signal ON" and "signal OFF," respectively.
12-9
12.2.3 Functional safety performance
Table 12.2-1 lists the safety performance values required by the Functional Safety Standard.
Table 12.2-1
Stop function
Functional Safety Performance
Safe Torque Off (STO)
(IEC/EN61800-5-2: 2007)
Response time
60 ms or less (From input to the terminal to Safe Torque Off)
Safety integrity level
SIL 2
PFH
(IEC/EN61800-5-2:2007)
-9
2.00 × 10
failure per
(Probability of a dangerous random hardware
hour) (IEC/EN61800-5-2: 2007)
Category
3
(EN ISO13849-1: 2008)
Performance level
PL-d
(EN ISO13849-1: 2008)
Mean time to dangerous
random hardware failure,
MTTFd
150 years
(EN ISO13849-1: 2008)
Hardware fault tolerance
HFT1
(IEC/EN61800-5-2: 2007)
Safe failure fraction
SFF: 60% or above, Type B
Systematic capability
SC2
Proof test interval
10 years
(IEC/EN61800-5-2: 2007)
(IEC/EN61508: 2010)
• The proof test refers to a periodical test to detect safety-related failures.
• The PFH is calculated with the Siemens standard model SN29500.
12-10
12.2.4 Inverter output state when Safe Torque Off (STO) is activated
Turning the emergency stop button ON turns EN1 and EN2 OFF, bringing the inverter into the Safe Torque Off
(STO) state.
Figure 12.2-3 Inverter Output State when the Emergency Stop Button is Turned OFF with the Inverter being
Stopped shows the timing scheme to apply when the emergency stop button is turned OFF with the inverter being
stopped. Input to the EN1 and EN2 comes ON, making the inverter ready to run.
Figure 12.2-3
Inverter Output State when the Emergency Stop Button is Turned OFF with the Inverter being
Stopped
Figure 12.2-4 Inverter Output State when the Emergency Stop Button is Turned ON with the Inverter Running
shows the timing scheme to apply when the emergency stop button is turned ON with the inverter running. Input
to the EN1 and EN2 goes OFF, bringing the inverter into the Safe Torque Off (STO) state and coasting the motor
to a stop.
Run command
Run
Stop
Emergency stop
button
OFF
ON
Input to EN1/EN2
ON
OFF
Inverter output
Running
Figure 12.2-4
Safe Torque Off
(STO)
Inverter Output State when the Emergency Stop Button is Turned ON with the Inverter Running
12-11
12.2.5 ecf alarm (caused by logic discrepancy) and inverter output state
Figure 12.2-5 shows the timing scheme to apply when EN1 and EN2 inputs are not aligned so that an alarm ecf
occurs.
Turning the emergency stop button ON turns EN1 and EN2 inputs OFF, which usually brings the inverter into the
Safe Torque Off (STO) state. If the misalignment of the EN1 and EN2 inputs is within 50 ms, no alarm occurs; if it
is more than 50 ms, the inverter interprets it as a logic discrepancy, outputting an alarm ecf. The alarm can be
cleared by restarting the inverter.
Power OFF
Power ON
Run command
Run
Emergency stop
button
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Input to EN1
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Input to EN2
ON
OFF
OFF
Stop
50 ms
alarm
Inverter output
No alarm
Running
ON
50 ms
Alarm issued
Safe Torque Off
(STO)
No alarm
Safe Torque Off
(STO)
Alarm issued
Wait for a run
command
Figure 12.2-5 ecf Alarm (Caused by Logic Discrepancy) and Inverter Output State
12-12
12.2.6 Prevention of restarting
To prevent the inverter from restarting just by turning the emergency stop button OFF, configure the Enable input
circuit as shown below. Figure 12.2-7 shows the timing scheme for prevention of restarting.
Assigning the HLD ("Enable 3-wire operation") to any digital input terminal and setting the E01 data to "6" sets up
the HLD function at the [X1] terminal.
After the FWD comes ON with the HLD being ON, even turning the FWD OFF keeps the inverter running due to
the HLD. Turning the emergency stop button ON under the condition causes the motor to coast to a stop. After
that, turning the emergency stop button OFF no longer starts the inverter to run. To run the inverter, turn the FWD
ON again.
FRENIC-VG
Output transistor
E
Power
supply
[P(+)]
[U]
[V]
[W]
[N(-)]
[FWD]
[X1]*1
[PLC]*2
Safety relay unit complying with
EN ISO13849-1 PL=d Cat. 3 or higher
Emergency
stop button
Reset
"Enable"
input
6
[PLC]
[EN1]
[EN2]
Gate driver
6
[Y1]*3
[CMY]*3
CPU
*1 Digital input terminal (e.g., [X1])
*2 If SW1 is in the SINK mode, [CM] applies; if in the SOURCE mode, [PLC] applies.
*3 Transistor output terminals (e.g., [Y1]-[CMY], DECF (Function code data=80))
Figure 12.2-6 Connection Diagram and Internal Circuit Configuration
Figure 12.2-7 Prevention of Restart
12-13
M
3~
12.3 Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards (cUL certification) (
)
Originally, the UL standards were established by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as private criteria for
inspections/investigations pertaining to fire/accident insurance in the USA. Later, these standards were authorized
as the official standards to protect operators, service personnel and the general populace from fires and other
accidents in the USA.
cUL certification means that UL has given certification for products to clear CSA Standards. cUL certified products
are equivalent to those compliant with CSA Standards.
„ Notes
UL/cUL-listed inverters are subject to the regulations set forth by the UL standards and CSA standards (cUL-listed
for Canada) by installation within precautions listed below.
1. Solid state motor overload protection (motor protection by electronic thermal overload relay) is provided in the inverter
(FRN-SVG1S or FRN-BVG1S series).
Use function codes F10 to F12 to set the protection level.
"WARNING – Operation of this equipment requires detailed operation instructions provided in the User’s Manual intended
for use with this product. This information is provided on the CD ROM included in the container this device was packaged
in. It should be retained with this device at all times. A hard copy of this information may be ordered through your local
service representative of Fuji Electric co.,ltd"
2. Use Cu wire only.
3. Use Class 1 wire only for control circuits.
4. Short circuit rating
"Suitable For Use On A Circuit Of Delivering Not More Than 100,000 rms Symmetrical Amperes, 480 Volts Maximum
when protected by Class J Fuses or a Circuit Breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100,000 rms
Symmetrical Amperes, 480 Volts Maximum."
"Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit protection must be
provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any additional local codes."
5. When wire is used, field wiring connections must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed-loop terminal
connector sized for the wire gauge involved. Connector must be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector
manufacturer.
6. All circuits with terminals L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R0, T0, R1, T1 must have a common disconnect and be connected to the
same pole of the disconnect if the terminals are connected to the power supply.
In case of the combination of Diode rectifier and Inverter
In case of the combination of PWM converter and Inverter
12-14
Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards (cUL-listed for Canada) (continued)
7. Environmental Requirements
・ Surrounding temperature
Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature 40°C
・ Atmosphere
For use in pollution degree 2 environments.(for Open-Type models)
8.Functional Description of Control Circuit Terminals
A power source for connection to the Integrated alarm output (30A, 30B, 30C) should be limited to
overvoltage category II such as control circuit or secondary winding of power transformer.
Classification
Contact output
Terminal
Symbol
[30A/B/C]
Terminal
Name
Integrated
alarm output
Functional description
When the inverter stops with an alarm, output is generated on the
relay contact (1C).
Contact capacitance: AC250 V 0.3A cosφ=1, DC30 V 0.5 A
9. Combinations of Diode rectifier(RHD series) and inverter(SVG1S or BVG1S series) are shown in the table below.
Diode rectifier
Type
RHD200S-4D□
RHD315S-4D□
MD/LD
mode
Applicable
inverter capacity
Combined conditions
[kW]
MD
110 to 200
1.The inverter which may be combined with this converter is made
into FRN-SVG1S or FRN-BVG1S series.
LD
110 to 220
2.The total capacity of all inverters shall not exceed the applicable
inverter capacity(kW).
MD
180 to 315
3.If it is less than mentioned capacity, two or more sets or a
different combination of capacity is possible for the inverter
connected to this converter.
LD
180 to 355
4.The number of the maximum connection to the converter of the
inverters is not restrained.
10. Combinations of PWM converter(RHC series) and inverter(FRN-SVG1S series or BVG1S series) are shown in the table
below
PWM converter
Type
RHC132S-4D□
RHC160S-4D□
MD/LD
mode
MD
132 max
LD
160 max
MD
LD
RHC200S-4D□
1.The inverter which may be combined with this converter is made
into FRN-SVG1S or BVG1S series.
2.The total capacity of all inverters shall not exceed the applicable
inverter capacity(kW).
3.If it is less than mentioned capacity, two or more sets or a
different combination of capacity is possible for the inverter
connected to this converter.
4.The number of the maximum connection to the converter of the
inverters is not restrained.
280 max
MD
LD
RHC315S-4D□
250 max
Combined conditions
MD
LD
RHC280S-4D□
220 max
MD
LD
RHC250S-4D□
200 max
MD
LD
RHC220S-4D□
Applicable
inverter capacity
[kW]
315 max
MD
LD
355 max
12-15
Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards (cUL-listed for Canada) (continued)
Three-phase
400V
RHD200S-4D□
RHD315S-4D□
Circuit breaker
trip size *5
(A)
Converter
type
Class J fuse size *4
(A)
Required torque
MD/LD mode
Power supply voltage
11.Install UL certified fuses or circuit breaker between the power supply and the converter, referring to the table below.
RHD series
MD
600
LD
-
MD
-
700
LD
-
800
Main terminal/
Grounding
Control circuit
MD/LD mode
Power supply
voltage
Three-phase 400V
RHD200S-4D□
LD
RHD315S-4D□
MD
LD
R1,T1
500
424.7
(48)
2
MD
Aux. fan
power supply
L1/R,L2/S,L3/
T
G
P,N,
Copper bar size (mm )
Converter type
lb-in (N・m)
Main terminal
10.6
(1.2)
Wire size
10.6
(1.2)
2
AWG (mm )
Aux. fan
power supply
Grounding
Control circuit
L1/R,L2/S
,
L3/T
P,N
5 by 30
(150)
4 by 40
(160)
10 by 30
(300)
8 by 50
(400)
12-16
G
1
(42.4)
1/0
(53.5)
2/0
(67.4)
R1,T1
16
(1.25)
*1
*2
14
(2.1)
*2
Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards (cUL-listed for Canada) (continued)
RHC160S-4D□
Three-phase 400V
RHC200S-4D□
RHC220S-4D□
RHC280S-4D□
RHC315S-4D□
RHC630B-4D□
RHC710B-4D□
RHC800B-4D□
Circuit breaker
trip size *5
(A)
RHC132S-4D□
Class J fuse
size *4
(A)
Converter type
MD/LD mode
Power supply
voltage
RHC series
MD
300
300
400
350
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
MD
700
LD
-
800
MD
-
1400
-
1600
-
1800
-
2200
MD
LD
MD
LD
424.7
(48)
RHC132S-4D□
MD/LD mode
Power supply
voltage
2
Converter type
Copper bar size (mm )
Main terminal
L1/R,L2/S
L3/T
Grounding
P,N
Three-phase 400V
RHC200S-4D□
RHC220S-4D□
RHC280S-4D□
RHC315S-4D□
RHC630B-4D□
RHC710B-4D□
RHC800B-4D□
LD
Control
circuit
G
R0,T0
R1,S1,T1
10.6
(1.2)
10.6
(1.2)
2
AWG (mm )
Aux. control
power
supply
Aux. fan
power supply
R0,T0
R1,T1
14
(2.1)
*2
14
(2.1)
*2
4
(21.2)
LD
RHC160S-4D□
6.1
(0.7)
Wire size
MD
MD
Aux. fan
power supply
-
-
LD
L1/R,L2/S,L3/T
P,N,
G
Control
circuit
500
600
MD
Main terminal/
Grounding
lb-in (N・m)
Aux. control
power
supply
600
-
LD
Required torque
5 by 30
(150)
3
(26.7)
4 by 40
(160)
1
(42.4)
MD
LD
1/0
(53.5)
MD
MD
LD
10 by 30
(150)
8 by 50
(400)
2/0
(67.4)
MD
LD
MD
2/0×2
(67.4×2)
LD
MD
LD
MD
10 by 125
(1250)
8 by 50
(3x400)
4/0×2
(107.2×2)
LD
12-17
16
(1.25)
*1
*2
Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards (cUL-listed for Canada) (continued)
30
Inverter type
FRN30SVG1S-4□
37
FRN37SVG1S-4□
45
FRN45SVG1S-4□
55
FRN55SVG1S-4□
75
FRN75SVG1S-4□
FRN90SVG1S-4□
110
FRN110SVG1S-4□
132
Three-phase 400V
FRN132SVG1S-4□
FRN160SVG1S-4□
FRN200SVG1S-4□
220
FRN220SVG1S-4□
250
FRN250SVG1S-4□
LD
MD
Type
Rating
(A)
170M339
4
-XA
200
FRN280SVG1S-4□
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
MD
LD
170M339
5
-XA
250
170M339
6
-XA
315
L1/R,L2/S,L3/
T
P,N,
G
FRN315SVG1S-4□
FRN630BVG1S-4□
FRN710BVG1S-4□
800
400
LD
170M444
5
-XA
MD
500
170M544
6
-XA
MD
630
-
6.1
(0.7)
MD
LD
170M654
6
-XA
800
170M654
7
-XA
900
170M654
8
-XA
1000
170M650
0
-XA
1250
170M753
2
1800
170M753
3
2000
170M759
5
2500
10.6
(1.2)
MD
LD
MD
MD
MD
LD
MD
MD
LD
MD
FRN800BVG1S-4□
R1,T1
238.9
(27)
170M344
8
-XA
LD
710
R0,T0
MD
LD
315
Aux. fan
power
supply
119.4
(13.5)
LD
LD
280
Aux. control
power
supply
Control
circuit
LD
200
1000
Main
terminal/
Grounding
lb-in (N・m)
MD
LD
160
630
Required torque
DC Bus
Fuse size
*3
LD
90
355
MD/LD mode
Nominal applied motor
Power supply voltage
FRN-SVG1S,FRN-BVG1S series
LD
12-18
10.6
(1.2)
424.7
(48)
30
Inverter type
HD/LD mode
Nominal applied
motor
Power supply
voltage
Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards (cUL-listed for Canada) (continued)
Copper bar size
2
(mm )
Groundin
g
Main terminal
P,N
FRN30SVG1S-4□
Wire size
U,V,W
MD
FRN37SVG1S-4□
FRN45SVG1S-4□
55
FRN55SVG1S-4□
75
FRN75SVG1S-4□
3 by 25
(75)
MD
2
(33.6)
*2
LD
MD
-
LD
FRN90SVG1S-4□
3/0
(85)
*2
3 by 30
(90)
LD
110
Three-phase 400V
FRN110SVG1S-4□
160
FRN160SVG1S-4□
200
FRN200SVG1S-4□
220
FRN220SVG1S-4□
250
FRN250SVG1S-4□
280
FRN280SVG1S-4□
315
355
630
FRN315SVG1S-4□
FRN630BVG1S-4□
FRN710BVG1S-4□
800
4
(21.2)
3
(26.7)
2
(33.6)
16
(1.25)
*1
*2
LD
MD
LD
4 by 40
(160)
5 by
30
(150)
14
(2.1)
*1
*2
1/0
(53.5)
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
LD
MD
8 by 50
(400)
10 by
30
(300)
2/0
(67.4)
-
LD
4/0
(107.2)
MD
LD
2/0×2
(67.4×2)
*6
MD
MD
LD
8 by 50
(400)
*6
10 by
125
(1250)
*6
MD
FRN800BVG1S-4□
6
(13.3)
MD
LD
710
1000
250
(127)
*2
LD
FRN132SVG1S-4□
R1,T1
4/0
(107.2)
*2
MD
132
R0,T0
1/0
(53.5)
*2
MD
MD
Aux. fan
power
supply
3
(26.7)
*2
LD
90
G
4
(21.2)
*2
LD
45
Contro
l
circuit
Aux.
control
power
supply
6
(13.3)
*2
MD
LD
37
2
AWG (mm )
LD
12-19
4/0×2
(107.2×2
)
*6
14
(2.1)
*2
Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards (cUL-listed for Canada) (continued)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
No terminal end treatment is required for connection.
Use 75°C Cu wire only.
Supplier: Cooper Bussmann
6 rms Amperes for aux. control power supply.
5 rms Amperes for aux. control power supply.
12. Filter stack(RHF series) and peripheral devices of PWM converter(RHC series) are not contained in UL/cUL authorization range.
13. If the keypad is removed from the inverter and mounts it to the out of the cabinet, it will be out of UL/cUL authorization range.
12-20
High Power Factor PWM Converter, RHC-D Series
with Power Regenerative Function (Stack Type)
Instruction Manual
First Edition, April 2013
Fourth Edition, July 2014
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
The purpose of this instruction manual is to provide accurate information in handling, setting up and operating of the converter
and filter stack. Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or omissions you may have found, or any
suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual.
In no event will Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of the
information in this manual.
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
Gate City Ohsaki, East Tower, 11-2, Osaki 1-chome, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-0032, Japan
URL http://www.fujielectric.com/
2014-07 (D13/D13)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising